Sie sind auf Seite 1von 268

05/08 CODE TECHNICAL REFERENCE

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGIAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

File No. SME06002800


R060821C5100-TTEC
Ver00_2006-12

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the
information contained herein.

Introduction
The 05/08 Code Technical Reference lists the codes in adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 for
the e-STUDIO163/165/203/205. It addresses their purposes, specific descriptions and timing. This document is intended to facilitate your understanding of the code functions and increase customer satisfaction.
Precautions in Servicing
For the codes used by the service technician, the cautions mentioned in the Service Handbook must be
stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has
completed the service training course.
Warning
Please handle any confidential information included in this manual with appropriate care.
If you fail to do so, you may be punished according to law.
Manual Format:
The manual consists as follows.
Introduction

Destination
How to read 05/08 code
Code table by category

Explains the expression of destination in this


book.
This code explains the written item and its content for each 05 and 08 code.
Adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 are
listed individually on a code table by category.
This code table is convenient for searching a
desired code.
It is possible to jump from this table to the item in
the body of this book directly.

1. 05 Adjustment Code Explains each 05 adjustment code.


2. 08 Setting Code
Explains each 08 setting code.

05/08 codes are basically explained in the numerical order. However, they are not always in an
order because several codes are provided for items that are described by function.

Destination:
The destinations described in this Technical Reference are as follows.
Notation
EUR

UC
JPN

Actual destination
ASD: Asia
AUD: Australia
CND: China
MJD: Europe
SAD/ASU: Saudi Arabia
KRD: Korea
ARD: Latin America
TWD: Taiwan
NAD: North America
JPD/FJP: Japan

Reference
As a classification of destinations, when
EUR is written, this signifies the entire destination except UC and JPN, unless otherwise written.

How to Read 05/08 Codes:


Following items are explained for each code.
[05 Adjustment Code]
Item
Code Number
Code Name
Purpose
Description

Adjustment Timing

Principle
Caution

Content
The number of a 05 adjustment code
The name of a code
Explains the purpose of the code.
Explains the adjustment content.
Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.
1. Codes, which execute only adjustment.
2. Codes, which execute after selecting the adjustment value.
These codes contain the default and the adjustment acceptable value.
* For detailed adjustment procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.4 Adjustment
mode (05)].
Explains the adjustment timing.

Explains the adjustment principle for the code that needs a specific explanation.

Explains the caution.


Perform the adjustment after reading the caution.
Important information including adjustment conditions (which order of codes to perform
adjustment) is written in this section.

[08 Setting Code]


Item
Code Number
Code Name
Purpose
Description

Setting Timing
Caution

Content
The number of a 08 setting code
The name of a code
Explains the purpose of the code.
Explains the setting content.
Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.
1. Codes, which execute only setting.
2. Codes, which execute after selecting the setting value.
These codes contain selectable options.
* For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.5 Setting mode
(08)].
Explains the setting timing.
Explains the caution.
Perform the setting after reading the caution.
Important information including restrictions on settings is written in this section.

CONTENTS
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

1. Code Table by Category.............................................................................................. 1-1


[05 Adjustment Code] .......................................................................................................... 1-1
[08 Setting Code] ................................................................................................................. 1-2

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05 ..................................................................................... 2-1


List of 05 Adjustment Code.................................................................................................. 2-1
05-200/201 .......................................................................................................................... 2-3
05-205 ................................................................................................................................. 2-4
05-210 ................................................................................................................................. 2-5
05-220 to 222 ...................................................................................................................... 2-6
05-233 to 235 ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
05-247/270 .......................................................................................................................... 2-8
05-248 ................................................................................................................................. 2-9
05-280 ............................................................................................................................... 2-10
05-286 ............................................................................................................................... 2-11
05-305 ............................................................................................................................... 2-12
05-306 ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
05-310 ............................................................................................................................... 2-14
05-311 to 313 .................................................................................................................... 2-15
05-340 ............................................................................................................................... 2-16
05-350/351 ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
05-354/355 ........................................................................................................................ 2-18
05-357 ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
05-358 ............................................................................................................................... 2-20
05-359 ............................................................................................................................... 2-21
05-365/366 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
05-401/405/1300 ............................................................................................................... 2-23
05-410/411/498 ................................................................................................................. 2-25
05-421/422 ........................................................................................................................ 2-27
05-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 2-29
05-430 to 438 .................................................................................................................... 2-30
05-440 to 445 .................................................................................................................... 2-32
05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 ............................................................................. 2-34
05-464 ............................................................................................................................... 2-37
05-466 ............................................................................................................................... 2-38
05-497 ............................................................................................................................... 2-39
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 .......................................................................... 2-41
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 ............................................................................. 2-42
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 ............................................................................. 2-43
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 ................................................................................. 2-44
05-532 to 534/835 to 837 .................................................................................................. 2-45
05-535 to 537/820 to 822 .................................................................................................. 2-46
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 .............................................................. 2-47
05-593 to 595 .................................................................................................................... 2-48
05-596 to 599 .................................................................................................................... 2-49
05-600 to 602/869 to 871 .................................................................................................. 2-50
05-609 ............................................................................................................................... 2-51
05-620 to 623/865 to 867 .................................................................................................. 2-52
05-648/654/655 ................................................................................................................. 2-53
05-664/665 ........................................................................................................................ 2-54
05-667/672/676/678 .......................................................................................................... 2-55

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

3. Code in Setting Mode 08 ............................................................................................. 3-1


List of 08 Setting Code ........................................................................................................ 3-1
08-202 ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
08-203 ................................................................................................................................. 3-7
08-204 ................................................................................................................................. 3-8
08-205 ................................................................................................................................. 3-9
08-206 ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
08-209 ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
08-219 ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
08-224 to 228 .................................................................................................................... 3-13
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 ............................................................................. 3-14
08-246 ............................................................................................................................... 3-15
08-250 ............................................................................................................................... 3-16
08-251 ............................................................................................................................... 3-17
08-252 ............................................................................................................................... 3-18
08-253 ............................................................................................................................... 3-19
08-254 ............................................................................................................................... 3-21
08-255 ............................................................................................................................... 3-22
08-258 ............................................................................................................................... 3-23
08-260 ............................................................................................................................... 3-24
08-261 ............................................................................................................................... 3-25
08-263 ............................................................................................................................... 3-26
08-265 ............................................................................................................................... 3-27
08-266 ............................................................................................................................... 3-28
08-273 ............................................................................................................................... 3-29
08-274 ............................................................................................................................... 3-30
08-276 ............................................................................................................................... 3-31
08-281 ............................................................................................................................... 3-32
08-283 ............................................................................................................................... 3-33
08-284 ............................................................................................................................... 3-34
08-285 ............................................................................................................................... 3-35
08-286 ............................................................................................................................... 3-36
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 .................................................................................... 3-37
08-300 ............................................................................................................................... 3-40
08-305 to 308 .................................................................................................................... 3-41
08-312 to 314 .................................................................................................................... 3-43
08-315/316 ........................................................................................................................ 3-45
08-320 to 323 .................................................................................................................... 3-46
08-327 to 329 .................................................................................................................... 3-47
08-330/332 ........................................................................................................................ 3-48
08-335 ............................................................................................................................... 3-49
08-345 ............................................................................................................................... 3-50
08-346 ............................................................................................................................... 3-51
08-347/353 ........................................................................................................................ 3-52
08-348/349 ........................................................................................................................ 3-53
08-352 ............................................................................................................................... 3-54
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 ............................................................................... 3-55
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 .............................................................. 3-56
08-381 ............................................................................................................................... 3-59
08-388/389 ........................................................................................................................ 3-60
08-400 ............................................................................................................................... 3-61
08-404/405 ........................................................................................................................ 3-62
08-407/411 ........................................................................................................................ 3-63
08-409/448 ........................................................................................................................ 3-64
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 .......................................................................... 3-65


08-414 ............................................................................................................................... 3-66
08-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 3-67
08-433/800/801/802/804/896 ............................................................................................ 3-68
08-439 to 441/523/526 ...................................................................................................... 3-69
08-455 ............................................................................................................................... 3-70
08-462 ............................................................................................................................... 3-71
08-463 ............................................................................................................................... 3-73
08-476/536/537/539 .......................................................................................................... 3-74
08-480 ............................................................................................................................... 3-76
08-481 ............................................................................................................................... 3-77
08-482 ............................................................................................................................... 3-78
08-483 ............................................................................................................................... 3-79
08-486 ............................................................................................................................... 3-80
08-502 ............................................................................................................................... 3-81
08-510 ............................................................................................................................... 3-82
08-515/516 ........................................................................................................................ 3-83
08-525/527/540/541 .......................................................................................................... 3-84
08-535 ............................................................................................................................... 3-86
08-538 ............................................................................................................................... 3-87
08-550 ............................................................................................................................... 3-88
08-603 ............................................................................................................................... 3-89
08-604 ............................................................................................................................... 3-90
08-611 ............................................................................................................................... 3-91
08-615 ............................................................................................................................... 3-92
08-617 ............................................................................................................................... 3-93
08-618 ............................................................................................................................... 3-94
08-631 ............................................................................................................................... 3-95
08-638 ............................................................................................................................... 3-96
08-641 ............................................................................................................................... 3-97
08-642 ............................................................................................................................... 3-98
08-649 ............................................................................................................................... 3-99
08-650 ............................................................................................................................. 3-101
08-655 ............................................................................................................................. 3-102
08-660/661 ...................................................................................................................... 3-103
08-666 ............................................................................................................................. 3-104
08-669 ............................................................................................................................. 3-105
08-672 ............................................................................................................................. 3-106
08-684/686 ...................................................................................................................... 3-107
08-685 ............................................................................................................................. 3-108
08-690 ............................................................................................................................. 3-109
08-691 ............................................................................................................................. 3-110
08-693 ............................................................................................................................. 3-111
08-695 ............................................................................................................................. 3-112
08-698 ............................................................................................................................. 3-113
08-699 ............................................................................................................................. 3-114
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 ............... 3-115
08-712/713/714 ............................................................................................................... 3-118
08-767 to 771/775 to 778 ................................................................................................ 3-119
08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 .................................................................... 3-120
08-830/868/869 ............................................................................................................... 3-122
08-831/870/871 ............................................................................................................... 3-123
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 ......................................................................................... 3-124
08-838 ............................................................................................................................. 3-126
08-839 ............................................................................................................................. 3-127
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 ...................................................................................... 3-128


08-886 ............................................................................................................................. 3-129
08-900/906 ...................................................................................................................... 3-130
08-905 ............................................................................................................................. 3-131
08-921/1951 .................................................................................................................... 3-132
08-922/923 ...................................................................................................................... 3-133
08-945 ............................................................................................................................. 3-134
08-947 ............................................................................................................................. 3-135
08-949 ............................................................................................................................. 3-136
08-970 ............................................................................................................................. 3-137
08-971 ............................................................................................................................. 3-138
08-973 ............................................................................................................................. 3-139
08-995 ............................................................................................................................. 3-140
08-1002 ........................................................................................................................... 3-141
08-1003 ........................................................................................................................... 3-142
08-1006 to 1010/1112 ..................................................................................................... 3-143
08-1011/1012 .................................................................................................................. 3-144
08-1013 ........................................................................................................................... 3-145
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 ............................................................................................ 3-146
08-1017 to 1019 .............................................................................................................. 3-147
08-1020 ........................................................................................................................... 3-148
08-1024/1025 .................................................................................................................. 3-149
08-1026 to 1029 .............................................................................................................. 3-150
08-1030 to 1032 .............................................................................................................. 3-151
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 ............................................................................... 3-152
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 ............................................................................................ 3-154
08-1055 ........................................................................................................................... 3-155
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 .............................................................................. 3-156
08-1073/1074 .................................................................................................................. 3-158
08-1075 to 1077 .............................................................................................................. 3-159
08-1078 to 1088 .............................................................................................................. 3-160
08-1093 to 1096 .............................................................................................................. 3-162
08-1114 ........................................................................................................................... 3-163
08-1123 ........................................................................................................................... 3-164
08-1124 ........................................................................................................................... 3-165
08-1141 ........................................................................................................................... 3-166
08-1144 ........................................................................................................................... 3-167
08-1149 ........................................................................................................................... 3-168
08-1372 ........................................................................................................................... 3-169
08-1378 ........................................................................................................................... 3-170
08-1380 ........................................................................................................................... 3-171
08-1382 ........................................................................................................................... 3-172
08-1385/1386/1388 ......................................................................................................... 3-173
08-1410 ........................................................................................................................... 3-174
08-1428 ........................................................................................................................... 3-175
08-1440 ........................................................................................................................... 3-176
08-1447 ........................................................................................................................... 3-177
08-1448 ........................................................................................................................... 3-178
08-1449 ........................................................................................................................... 3-179
08-1450 ........................................................................................................................... 3-180
08-1451 ........................................................................................................................... 3-181
08-1628 ........................................................................................................................... 3-182
08-1882 ........................................................................................................................... 3-183
08-1913 ........................................................................................................................... 3-184
08-1952 to 1955 .............................................................................................................. 3-185
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

08-1960 to 1979 .............................................................................................................. 3-186


08-1989 ........................................................................................................................... 3-187
08-1990 ........................................................................................................................... 3-188
08-1991 ........................................................................................................................... 3-189
08-1993 ........................................................................................................................... 3-190
08-1994 ........................................................................................................................... 3-191
08-1996 ........................................................................................................................... 3-192

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1.

Code Table by Category


1

2.

Code in Adjustment Mode 05


2

3.

Code in Setting Mode 08


3

1. Code Table by Category


05 adjustment code and 08 setting code are provided by the category in the table.
There are category names only for 05 adjustment code and 08 setting code and common for both
codes.

[05 Adjustment Code]


Category
ADF/RADF

Sub category
Aligning amount
Transporting

Image

Image density

Printer density
Gamma table
Gamma balance
Gamma slope
Background adjustment
Sharpness
Smudged/Faint text
Toner saving
Margin
Range correction

Paper feeding

Drive
Development

Scanner

Charger
Transfer
Separation
Process
Laser

Paper pushing
amount
Aligning amount
Exit motor
Main motor
Auto-toner
Developer bias
Temperature
Drum temperature
LED
Position
Carriage position
Shading position
Reproduction ratio
Peak
Main charger bias
Transfer bias
Separation bias
Toner recycle
Write starting

05 Adjustment Code
05-354/355
05-357
05-358
05-365/366
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862
05-667/672/676/678
05-609
05-596 to 599
05-593 to 595
05-600 to 602/869 to 871

Refer to page
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-22
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-55
2-51
2-49
2-48
2-50

05-620 to 623/865 to 867


05-648/654/655
05-664/665
05-430 to 438
05-532 to 534/835 to 837
05-535 to 537/820 to 822
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832
05-466

2-52
2-53
2-54
2-30
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-38

05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474


05-424/425
05-421/422
05-200/201
05-247/270
05-205
05-248
05-311 to 313
05-305
05-306
05-359
05-350/351
05-340
05-310
05-210
05-220 to 222
05-233 to 235
05-280
05-410/411/498
05-440 to 445

2-34
2-29
2-27
2-3
2-8
2-4
2-9
2-15
2-12
2-13
2-21
2-17
2-16
2-14
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-10
2-25
2-32

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-1

[08 Setting Code]


Category
RADF
Counter

Sub category
Duplex copying
Scan count
Double count

Total counter copy


Total number of
pages
Toner cartridge
Transmitted/
Received pages in
FAX
Number of output
pages
External counter
Paper source
Media type
Fuser unit

Scanner

Data clear
Network

Control status
Transmitting E-mail
Memory full
SRAM
AppleTalk
NetWare
SNMP
DDNS
DNS
POP3
E-mail
Enable server's

FTP
HTTP
IP Conflict
IP Filter
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
LPD
MAC address
NCP

08 Setting Code
08-685
08-312 to 314
08-327 to 329
08-345
08-347/353
08-348/349
08-352
08-388/389
08-335

Refer to page
3-108
3-43
3-47
3-50
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-60
3-49

08-1410
08-315/316
08-330/332

3-174
3-45
3-48

08-305 to 308
08-320 to 323
08-381
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411
08-1385/1386/1388
08-1372
08-1378
08-1380
08-1382
08-463
08-273
08-1144
08-1428
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105
08-1026 to 1029
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099
08-1020
08-1017 to 1019
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098
08-265
08-1989
08-1990
08-1991
08-1993
08-1994
08-1996
08-1055
08-1030 to 1032
08-1440
08-1960 to 1979
08-1006 to 1010/1112
08-1011/1012
08-1075 to 1077
08-1141
08-1013

3-41
3-46
3-59
3-55
3-173
3-169
3-170
3-171
3-172
3-73
3-29
3-167
3-175
3-146
3-150
3-156
3-148
3-147
3-154
3-27
3-187
3-188
3-189
3-190
3-191
3-192
3-155
3-151
3-176
3-186
3-143
3-144
3-159
3-166
3-145

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-2

Category
Network

Sub category
NIC
NetWare printing
NT domain
PCL
SMTP
Raw TCP
Raw Port
Raw printing
Web data
WINS
Internet FAX

Version

Fax
Image processing

Maintenance

Workgroup name
Automatic transfer
FROM
System/PFC
Controller ROM /
Scan ROM
Function table data
/ language data
Automatic transfer
LED flashing
Auto-toner
Toner recycle
Drum life correction
Temperature/
Humidity
FSMS
RDMS
PM

Laser

Image

Error history
Telephone number
Service notification
Equipment number
Polygonal motor
Laser power
Error diffusion /
dither
Default setting

08 Setting Code
08-1002
08-1003
08-1093 to 1096
08-1123
08-973
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111
08-1073/1074
08-945
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979
08-260
08-1024/1025
08-266
08-274
08-1114
08-1124
08-660/661
08-921/1951
08-900/906
08-1952 to 1955

Refer to page
3-141
3-142
3-162
3-164
3-139
3-152
3-158
3-134
3-37
3-24
3-149
3-28
3-30
3-163
3-165
3-103
3-132
3-130
3-185

08-922/923

3-133

08-510
08-1913
08-455
08-838
08-1628
08-839

3-82
3-184
3-70
3-126
3-182
3-127

08-258
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to
730/772/773/780 to 790/796
08-251
08-252
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/
1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
08-253
08-250
08-767 to 771/775 to 778
08-995
08-483
08-486
08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884
08-502

3-23
3-115

3-19
3-16
3-119
3-140
3-79
3-80
3-128
3-81

08-538
08-550

3-87
3-88

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-17
3-18
3-56

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-3

Category
Paper feeding

Sub category
Change of paper
source
Retry
Paper feeding
Default setting
Paper exit

Development
User interface

Paper size
Paper dimension
Auto-toner[
Developer bias
X in 1
Custom mode
Copy volume
Job clear
Energy saving
mode
Sorting
Timer

Template
File
Book type
External counter
Administrator
Default setting

Department management
Paper size

08 Setting Code
08-481

Refer to page
3-77

08-482
08-254
08-255
08-480
08-698
08-699
08-224 to 228
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471
08-414
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863
08-650
08-631
08-300
08-246
08-970

3-78
3-21
3-22
3-76
3-113
3-114
3-13
3-14
3-66
3-124
3-101
3-95
3-40
3-15
3-137

08-641
08-649
08-204
08-205
08-206
08-691
08-209
08-219
08-611
08-202
08-263
08-276
08-281
08-283
08-284
08-285
08-286
08-603
08-604
08-618
08-642
08-617

3-97
3-99
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-110
3-11
3-12
3-91
3-6
3-26
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-89
3-90
3-94
3-98
3-93

08-261

3-25

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-4

Category
General

Main charger bias


Fuser

Transfer bias
SEparation bias

Sub category
Enhanced bold
All clear
Reset
Database
Toner cartridge
check
Nearly empty
Partition
Page setting
Memory
Equipment adjustment mode
Initialization

Time differences
Restriction to 250
sheets exiting
Department management
Main charger bias
Pre-running
Temperature

Status counter
Transfer bias
Separation bias

08 Setting Code
08-1149
08-669
08-655
08-684/686
08-695

Refer to page
3-168
3-105
3-102
3-107
3-112

08-971
08-666
08-949
08-615
08-203

3-138
3-104
3-136
3-92
3-7

08-690
08-693
08-947
08-1882
08-638
08-712/713/714

3-109
3-111
3-135
3-183
3-96
3-118

08-672

3-106

08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867


08-439 to 441/523/526
08-404/405
08-407/411
08-409/448
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521
08-424/425
08-433/800/801/802/804/896
08-476/536/537/539
08-515/516
08-525/527/540/541
08-535
08-400
08-830/868/869
08-831/870/871

3-120
3-69
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-67
3-68
3-74
3-83
3-84
3-86
3-61
3-122
3-123

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1-5

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1-6

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05


List of 05 Adjustment Code
Code
05-200/201
05-205
05-210
05-220 to 222
05-233 to 235
05-247/270
05-248
05-280
05-286
05-305
05-306
05-310
05-311 to 313
05-340
05-350/351
05-354/355
05-357
05-358
05-359
05-365/366
05-401/405/1300
05-410/411/498
05-421/422
05-424/425
05-430 to 438
05-440 to 445
05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474
05-464
05-466
05-497
05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847
05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852

Content
Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
Developer Bias Output Adjustment
Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment
Transfer DC Output Adjustment
Separation DC Output Adjustment
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/
Humidity Display
Drum Thermistor Temperature Display
Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle
Laser Power Adjustment
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary
Scanning Direction
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary
Scanning Direction
Forced Performing of Peak Detection
R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning
Shading Position Adjustment
ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment
Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed
ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment
CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning
from ADF/RADF
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary
Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is
Used)
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal
Motor Rotation Speed)
Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing
Start Position
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary
Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main
Motor Rotation Speed)
Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed
Margin Adjustment
Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing
Start Position
Aligning Amount Adjustment
Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope)
Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind
Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation
Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Page
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-27
2-29
2-30
2-32
2-34
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-41
2-42

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-1

Code
05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857
05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862
05-532 to 534/835 to 837
05-535 to 537/820 to 822
05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832
05-593 to 595
05-596 to 599
05-600 to 602/869 to 871
05-609
05-620 to 623/865 to 867
05-648/654/655
05-664/665
05-667/672/676/678

Content
Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine
Adjustment (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment
(Copy/Scanner Function)
Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/
Scanner Function)
Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function)
Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function)
Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function)
Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/
Scanner Function)
Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer
Function)
Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function)
Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX
Function)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

Page
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-2

05-200/201
Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
Purpose
When code 05-200 is performed, it automatically corrects the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor. This
allows the toner density in the developer material to be measured accurately. Code 05-201 is used to
adjust the automatic adjustment value acquired from code 05-200.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-200
05-201

Applied to
Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor
Automatic adjustment output value correction of auto-toner sensor

Description
When code 05-200 is performed, the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor is automatically adjusted. This
automatically adjusts the output voltage of the sensor so that the toner density in the developer material
can be detected appropriately. The adjustment requires approximately two minutes.
When the value displayed on the control panel is not within the range of 232 to 248 (the auto-toner sensor output is 2.32 to 2.48) after code 05-200 is performed, a value must be entered within the specified
value, by using the [ZOOM] ([25%] or [200%]) button for the e-STUDIO163, or the [Up] or [Down] button for the e-STUDIO165/205 on the control panel.
For further information, refer to 3.1 [Adjustment of Auto-toner Sensor] in the Service Handbook.
By adjusting code 05-201, the automatic adjustment value of the auto-toner sensor acquired from performing code 05-200 can be corrected. As the set value is increased, the toner density in the developer
material and the printing density become higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the
toner density in the developer material and the printing density become lower.
05-201:
* Default: 141
* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum sensor output, 255: Maximum sensor output)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes when replacing the developer material.

Caution

Perform this adjustment with the developer unit filled with only the developer material (with no toner
cartridge loaded, as well as no toner left in the cleaner unit). The equipment adopts the toner recycle
system. Therefore, when recycled toner left in the cleaner unit is transferred, proper adjustment cannot be performed.)
Adjustment of the toner density in the toner developer material should usually be performed by
"Toner density correction (08-414)" instead of code 05-201.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-3

05-205
Developer Bias Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the condition of toner amount adhered onto the photoconductive drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the
high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the developer bias output with this code.
When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the developer bias output adjustment and the following
adjustments must be performed at the same time.
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)
Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the
high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (magnetic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher
density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output
voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the
drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.
*
*

Default: 05-220: 165, 05-221: 179, 05-222: 126


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing

When replacing the high-voltage transformer


If an avatar phenomenon occurs
If poor transfer occurs

Caution

Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust these codes.
Decrease the transfer DC output value, if the avatar phenomenon occurs at the halftone area. Note
that when the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer may occur.
Increase the transfer DC output value, if poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire being
soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much.
Therefore, use thick paper mode to use thick paper.
By using the following codes, the transfer DC output values set by codes 05-220 to 222 are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)
- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-4

05-210
Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias output from the high
voltage transformer.

Description
When the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output
from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface
becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is
formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs. On the other hand,
as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower. Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent
image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.
*
*

Default: 78
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code when replacing the high-voltage transformer.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust this code.
By using "Main charger bias correction (08-805 to 809/826/864 to 867), the main charger grid bias
output value set by code 05-210 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-5

05-220 to 222
Transfer DC Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the toner transfer condition from the drum to paper
changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage
transformer, it is necessary to adjust the transfer DC output with these codes. The adjustment is applied
each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the transfer DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the
same time.
Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-220
05-221
05-222

Applied to
Transfer DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of
paper
Transfer DC output adjustment (C), center of paper
Transfer DC output adjustment (L), range at approx. 5 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main
charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the
other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.
*
*

Default: 05-220: 128, 05-221: 141, 05-222: 108


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing

When replacing the high-voltage transformer.


When an avatar is seen.
When poor transfer occurs.

Caution

Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
A digital tester and a high-voltage transformer adjustment jig are required.
Decrease the transfer DC output value when an avatar is seen at the halftone area. Note that when
the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer could occur.
Increase the transfer DC output value when poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire
being soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too
much. Therefore, when using thick paper, thick paper mode should be used.
By using the following setting codes, the transfer DC output values set by these codes are corrected
to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)
- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-6

05-233 to 235
Separation DC Output Adjustment
Purpose
When the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the DC voltage value to separate paper from the drum
changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage
transformer, it is necessary to adjust the separation DC output by using these codes. The adjustment is
applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the separation DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time.
Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)
Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)
Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-233
05-234
05-235

Applied to
Separation DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge
of paper
Separation DC output adjustment (C), center of paper
Separation DC output adjustment (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading
edge of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage is increased and positive charges on the paper are
decreased; therefore, the separation is easier to be performed. On the other hand, as the set value is
decreased, the DC voltage is decreased and the ratio of the positive charges on the paper decreasing
is reduced; therefore, the separation is more difficult to be performed.
For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.
*
*

Default: 05-233: 55, 05-234: 55, 05-235: 36


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Separation is more difficult, 255: separation is easier)

Adjustment Timing

When replacing the high-voltage transformer


If poor paper separation occurs
If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs

Caution

Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.
The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for service are required to adjust these codes.
Increase the separation DC output, if poor paper separation occurs regardless of the charger wire
being soiled or if thin paper is used frequently. Note that poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs
when the separation DC output is increased too much.
If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs, decrease the separation DC output value. Note that
when the separation output value is decreased too much, paper separation ability decreases.
By using the following codes, the separation DC output values set by codes 05-233 to 235 are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition.
- Separation DC output correction (08-831/870/871)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-7

05-247/270
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/Humidity Display
Purpose
These codes are used to display the temperature and humidity of the environment where the equipment is installed.
The temperature and humidity are detected through the temperature/humidity sensor installed on the
left of the equipment.
The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.
These codes are used only to display the temperature or humidity, and no values can be set.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-247
05-270

Applied to
Temperature/humidity sensor humidity display
Temperature/humidity sensor temperature display

Description
When these codes are performed, the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/
humidity sensor are displayed. When the print operation is completed, the temperature and humidity
data is retrieved and each display is updated.
*
*

Default: 05-247: 50 (%), 05-270: 23 (C)


Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/humidity
sensor.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2-8

05-248
Drum Thermistor Temperature Display
Purpose
This code is used to display the temperature of the drum surface.
The temperature of the drum is detected through the drum thermistor installed in the developer unit.
The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.
This code is used only to display the temperature, and no values can be set.

Description
When this code is performed, the temperature of the drum detected through the drum thermistor is displayed.
When the print operation is completed, the temperature data is retrieved and the drum temperature display is updated.
*
*

Default: 23 (C)
Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to check the temperature of the drum.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2-9

05-280
Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle
Purpose
This code is used to idle the recovery toner supply mechanism and forcibly remove toner from the
cleaner unit when replacing the developer material.

Description
When this code is performed, the recovery toner supply mechanism is idled and toner is forcibly
removed from the cleaner unit.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, and then replace the developer material.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10

05-286
Laser Power Adjustment
Purpose
Latent image is produced when the laser beam is irradiated onto the drum. This code is used to adjust
the printing density by adjusting the output of the laser beam.

Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On
the other hand, as it is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower.
*
*

Default: 60
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the printing density by changing the laser power.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


By using "Laser power correction (08-872/873/875 to 877/883), the laser output value set by code
05-286 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be
set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 11

05-305
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Direction
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner secondary scanning direction, to fit in
the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the
start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the
image moves to the leading edge of paper.
*
*

Default: 105
Acceptable values: 51 to 206 (51: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 206: Maximum to the trailing edge of paper)
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a copy image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution

This adjustment requires a scale.


Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12

05-306
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner primary scanning direction, to fit in the
proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary
scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start
point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the front of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image
moves to the rear of paper.
Default: 127
Acceptable values: 121 to 136 (121: Maximum to the rear of paper, 136: Maximum to the front of
paper)
When the set value is decreased

Scanner primary scanning direction

*
*

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution

This adjustment requires a scale.


Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 13

05-310
Forced Performing of Peak Detection
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to absorb the variation in the amount of light emitted from the exposure light sources
for each LED (R-LED, B-LED and YG-LED) installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit, due to
individual differences and secular changes, to optimize the amount of light emitted through the life cycle
of the equipment, and to ensure the color sensitivity when scanning an original.

Description
When this code is performed, each LED individually lights up and the amount of light emitted is automatically adjusted, and the adjusted current emission value is retained. Then, each LED lights up
according to the retained current value.
Notes:
Perform this code according to the following steps:
1. Close the original cover, ADF or RADF.
2. Enter this code in 05 ADJUSTMENT code. Then Press the [START] or [COPY] button.
3. Automatic adjustment is performed as described below:
- The CIS unit moves.
- After the equipment is suspended for a few seconds, the green light is emitted from the
light source for some ten seconds, and goes out for a moment.
- The red light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment.
- The blue light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a
moment.
- The yellow light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a
moment.
- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds, and then goes
out for a moment.
- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for some ten seconds, and then
goes out.
4. Press the [CANCEL] button to finish the adjustment.
* An error (C26) may occasionally occur during the adjustment. If the error occurs, refer to Caution to handle the error.

Adjustment Timing
When replacing the CIS unit, MAIN board and SRAM board

Caution
If the error (C26) occurs when this code is performed, handle the error according to the following steps:
1) Set the default values for codes 05-311, 312 and 313.
2) Perform this code.
* In case the error occurs at this point, proceed with the next step.
3) Turn the main switch OFF and ON to normally start up the equipment.
* In case the error (C26) still occurs even after the above operations, replace the CIS unit and perform
this code again.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14

05-311 to 313
R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the current actual value for the exposure light source installed on the
CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-311
05-312
05-313

Applied to
R-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)
B-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)
YG-LED Current actual value adjustment (LED alley: sub light source)

Description
When this code is performed, the current actual value (current set initial value + light amount correction
value) for each LED is changed.
The default value is set at the same as the current set initial value for each LED (without correction).
*
*

Default: 05-311: 76, 05-312: 62, 05-313: 160


Acceptable values: 0 to 255

Adjustment Timing
None.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 15

05-340
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scan speed in the scanner secondary scanning direction to scan an original in the actual ratio.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction
becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 134
Acceptable values: 76 to 181 (76: Minimum reproduction ratio, 181: Maximum reproduction ratio,
Adjustment amount: 0.0947%/step)

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- CIS unit

Caution

This adjustment requires a scale.


Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16

05-350/351
Shading Position Adjustment
Purpose
When streaky images are output due to scratches or dirt on the shading correction plate, these codes
are used to adjust the shading correction position in order to enable shading correction while keeping
off the scratches or dirt.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-350
05-351

Applied to
Shading position adjustment when using the original glass
Shading position adjustment when using the ADF/RADF

Description
As the set value is increased, the shading correction position moves to the left of the equipment. On the
other hand, as it is decreased, the shading correction position moves to the right of the equipment.
*
*

Default: 128
Acceptable values: 118 to 138 (Adjustment amount: 0.064 mm/step)

In the case of scratches or dirt on a part of the shading correction plate, use these codes to adjust the
shading correction position while keeping off the scratches or dirt, and prevent images from being
streaky.

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if images with streaks in the secondary scanning direction are produced.

Caution

If streaky images persist after this adjustment is performed, clean the shading correction plate.
If streaky images still persist, replace the shading correction plate.
If streaky images still persist, check other areas, such as the drum, for flaws or dirt.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 17

05-354/355
ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment
*

Code 05-355 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
A skew of the original is eliminated by making its leading edge contact the aligning roller and slightly
slacking it, when the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder) is used to fed. These codes are used to adjust the paper aligning amount for the accurate
alignment of the leading edge of paper. Individual codes are available because different rollers are used
when scanning simplex and duplex originals.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-354
05-355

Applied to
Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)
Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 10
Acceptable values: 0 to 20 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 20: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing
When feeding a simplex (face) original:
If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF feed roller and if this causes a
defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.
When feeding a duplex (reverse side) original:
If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF reverse roller and if this causes
a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the reverse roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18

05-357
Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction. This can be done
by changing the ADF/RADF read motor rotating speed because it can change the speed of the original
passing the ADF original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction
becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 50
Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 100: Maximum reproduction ratio)

When the set value is decreased

Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
After the following part are replaced, if there is a problem with a copied image done by ADF/RADF and
if the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning is required, perform this adjustment.
- Read motor (parts for the ADF/RADF)

Caution

This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.


The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment.
If deviated from its correct position, the scanning position when using the ADF/RADF cannot be correctly adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 19

05-358
ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the scanning position in the scanner primary scanning direction when the
ADF/RADF is used, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning
direction.

Description
As the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary
scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start
point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is
increased, the image moves to the rear of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image
moves to the front of paper.
Default: 128
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the front of paper, 255: Maximum to the rear of paper)

When the set value is decreased

Scanner primary scanning direction

*
*

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
If there is a problem in the printing image of the ADF/RADF and range adjustment of scanner primary
scanning direction is required, perform this adjustment.

Caution

This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.


The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct position, the scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20

05-359
CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning from ADF/RADF
Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, the amount of light reflected from the exposure light
source becomes to the maximum and the CIS unit position is determined where the best image can be
obtained.

Description
As the set value is increased, the CIS unit moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the CIS unit moves to the right of the equipment.
*
*

Default: 128
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the right of the equipment, 255: Maximum to the left of
the equipment)

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment, if a scan image when the ADF/RADF is used results in poor quality, compared
to a scan image using the original glass.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 21

05-365/366
Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction
(When the ADF/RADF is Used)
Purpose
When the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, it is transported to the scanning position on the original glass and then stopped. These codes are used to adjust the original stop position on the original
glass, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-365
05-366

Applied to
Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)
Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

Description
As the set value is increased, the original is transported to the position closer to the original scale. As a
result, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction.
On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the original is transported to the position far away
from the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner
secondary scanning direction.
On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of
paper. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper.
*
*

Default: 50
Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 100: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate scanning position

When the set value is increased

Scanning range

Scanner secondary scanning direction (when the RADF is used)

To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they
are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment Timing
For instance, after the ADF/RADF is installed and the test copy is made, if the scan start position is
deviated from the appropriate position, perform this adjustment.

Caution
The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly
adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct
position, scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22

05-401/405/1300
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction
(Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed)
*
*

Code 05-1300 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


Code 05-1300 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror. This changes in pitch of the
laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum primary scanning direction and finally adjusts the
reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-401
05-405
05-1300

Sub code
0
1

Applied to
Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the printer operation
Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the copy operation
Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing
without rotating an image)
Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing
with rotating an image)

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction is increased. On
the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.
*
*

Default: 05-401: 134, 05-405: 131, 05-1300-0/1: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-401]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st
line and the 21st line from the left edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the
specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (A)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Primary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 23

[05-405]

Primary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

Shaded areas indicate the image on the paper.

[05-1300]
Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction
ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected primary scanning ratio, code 05-1300
can be used to finely correct the primary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for
code 05-401.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Laser optical unit
- SRAM board

Caution

The adjustment for code 05-405 requires a scale.


Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.
Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction
ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-1300 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required. If the
adjustment using code 05-1300 is still necessary, perform the image dimensional adjustment prior to
this adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24

05-410/411/498
Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position
*

Code 05-498 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning
direction, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-410
05-411
05-498

Sub code
0
1

Applied to
Printing position of primary scanning direction in the copy operation
Printing position of primary scanning direction in the printer operation
Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,
Long size paper
Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,
Short size paper (A4/LT or smaller)

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position of the image is shifted toward the end point (in a
direction where the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it
is decreased, the printing position is shifted toward the start point (in a direction where the left margin
narrows) of the primary scanning direction.
*
*

Default: 05-410/411: 88, 05-498-0/1: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

[05-410]
The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted when
code 05-411 is adjusted.
[05-411]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left
edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified
range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Primary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 25

[05-498]
Key in 3, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to duplex
print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the
left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Primary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Laser optical unit
- SRAM board

Caution

Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.
The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted
when code 05-411 is adjusted.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26

05-421/422
Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction
(Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed)
*
*

Code 05-422 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


Code 05-422 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
Changing the rotation speed of the drum changes the pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated
in the drum secondary scanning direction and adjusts the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning
direction.
* By fine adjusting the main motor speed with these codes, rotation speed of transport rollers changes
at the same time and appropriate "secondary scanning reproduction ratio" adjustment is performed.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-421
05-422

Applied to
Printing reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the copy and
printer operations
Image reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the fax operation

Description
As the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction is increased.
On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.
*
*

Default: 05-421/422: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-421]
Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st
line and the 21st line from the leading edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is
within the specified range, 200 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (C)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Paper movement direction

Secondary scanning direction

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 27

[05-422]
Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected secondary scanning ratio, code 05-422
can be used to finely correct the secondary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for
code 05-421.)

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:
- Main motor - Drum

Caution
Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-422 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28

05-424/425
Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed
*
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


The exit motor is installed only when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit) is installed.
Code 05-425 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the exit motor rotation speed is too fast, paper sent from the fuser unit is tight. By adjusting the
rotation speed of the exit motor, the paper becoming tight can be prevented.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-424
05-425

Applied to
Exit motor speed in the copy and printer operations
Exit motor speed in the fax operation

Description
As the set value is increased, the rotation speed becomes faster. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the rotation speed becomes slower.
*
*

Default: 05-424: 128, 05-425: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum rotation speed, 255: Maximum rotation speed)

Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation
speed. When code 05-425 is used, the basic adjusted value can be finely adjusted even more. However, basically, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary.

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced, if paper sent from the fuser unit is tight, perform this adjustment:
- Exit roller

Caution

Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation
speed, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.
Basically, adjustment is unnecessary because an ideal value is specified for the difference in speed
between the main motor as the driving source of the fuser roller, and the exit motor as the driving
source of the exit roller. Use these codes in a particular case, for example, paper transported
between the fuser roller and exit roller is tight due to its characteristics.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 29

05-430 to 438
Margin Adjustment
*

Code 05-434 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
Perform top/left/right/bottom margin in copy and printer modes. Perform bottom margin adjustment at
duplex printing.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-430

Sub code
-

05-431

05-432

05-433

05-434

0
1

05-435

05-436

05-437

05-438

Applied to
Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper
along the paper feeding direction)
Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the
paper feeding direction)
Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along
the paper feeding direction)
Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the
paper along the paper feeding direction)
Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank
area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank
area at the trailing of the paper along the paper feeding
direction)
Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper
along the paper feeding direction)
Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the
paper feeding direction)
Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along
the paper feeding direction)
Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the
paper along the paper feeding direction)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

Function mode
Copy

Printer

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30

Description
By adjusting the image cutting range, adjustment of an apparent blank area is performed. As the set
value is increased, the margin (the area of the image being cut) increases. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the margin becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 05-430: 9, 05-431: 0, 05-432: 110, 05-433: 153, 05-434: 29, 05-435: 24, 05-436 to 438: 0
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum margin, 255: Maximum margin)

Paper movement direction


Top margin

Bottom margin
Right

Bottom

Top

Primary scanning direction

Right margin

Left margin
Left

Adjustment Timing
When the margin is not in a specified value.

Caution

Open the original cover, ADF or RADF to perform this adjustment.


The left margin adjustment using codes 05-431/436 is unnecessary because the left margin is fixed
when "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is performed.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 31

05-440 to 445
Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position
*

Codes 05-443 to 445 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the paper transport start timing of the laser writing, to fit in the printing
range of the image in the printer secondary scanning direction.
The benchmark for this adjustment is the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used
to feed (05-440). When code 05-440 is performed, the adjusted content is applied to the secondary
scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Codes other than code 05-440 are provided in order to finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when each unit is used to feed.
These codes must be performed after the secondary scanning printing position is adjusted when the
drawer is used to feed.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-440
05-441
05-442
05-443
05-444
05-445

Applied to
Secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed
Secondary scanning printing position when the PFU (Paper Feed Unit) is
used to feed
Secondary scanning printing position when the bypass tray is used to feed
Reserved
Secondary scanning printing position when the PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal)
is used to feed
Secondary scanning printing position when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing
Unit) is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the image printing position is shifted toward the end point (trailing edge of
paper) of the secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image printing
position is shifted toward the start point (leading edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction.
*
*

Default: 05-440: 14, 05-441: 21


Acceptable values: 0 to 40 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 40: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)

*
*

Default: 05-442 to 445: 8


Acceptable values: 0 to 15 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 15: Maximum to the trailing
edge of paper)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32

Key in 1 ([05-445] key in 3), press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the
[START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from each paper source. (A3/LD-sized paper
is only for the drawer and ADU. A4/LT-sized paper is for other units.)
Next, measure the distance from the leading edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern,
and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (D)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Paper movement direction

Secondary scanning direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following part is replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment.
- Laser optical unit

Caution

First, adjust the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440).
When code 05-440 is performed, this adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing
position when other units are used to feed. Then finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when other than the drawer is used to feed.
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444
> 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 >
05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/
205.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 33

05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474


Aligning Amount Adjustment
*

Codes 05-448, 449, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of a paper skew by making the paper contact the registration (aligning)
roller and slightly slacking the paper. This code is used to change the paper aligning amount.
The aligning amount is adjusted on an envelope according to "Aligning amount adjustment (envelope)
(05-464)."
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal) Upper/Lower Drawer]
Code
05-448

05-449

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size
PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

Note:
Only two types of codes are described here. For other codes and default, refer to the next pages.
The upcoming explanations for the following parts regarding "Adjustment timing", "Caution" are
common; therefore, they are abbreviated.
The paper sizes described here are as follows:
Paper size
Long size
Middle size
Short size

Size
330 mm or longer
220 mm to 329 mm
219 mm or shorter

Description
As the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 14
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing

If paper cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller and if this causes a defective
image, such as a skew, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is
useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image.
If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34

Caution
Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this
adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.
05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 >
05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437
> 05-438 > 05-434
* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

2
[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Drawer]
Code
05-450

*
*

Sub code
0
1
2

Applied to
Drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size
Drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size
Drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

Default: 22
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFU (Paper Feed Unit)]


Code
05-451

*
*

Sub code
0
1
2

Applied to
PFU, when plain paper is fed, long size
PFU, when plain paper is fed, middle size
PFU, when plain paper is fed, short size

Default: 14
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit)]


Code
05-455

05-474

*
*

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
ADU, when plain paper is fed, long size
ADU, when plain paper is fed, middle size
ADU, when plain paper is fed, short size
ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size
ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size
ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size

Default: 05-455-0 to 2: 38, 05-474-0/1: 24, 05-474-2: 33


Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 35

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Bypass Tray]


Code
05-458

05-460

05-461

05-462

05-463

*
*

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
0
1
2

Applied to
Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, long size
Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, middle size
Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, short size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, long size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, middle size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, short size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, long size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, middle size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, short size
Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, post card
Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, long size
Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, middle size
Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, short size

Default: 10
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36

05-464
Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope)
Purpose
"Aligning" refers to a correction of skew of an envelope when the envelope is fed from the bypass tray.
The envelope is aligned by making its leading edge contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly
slacking it. This code is used to adjust the envelope aligning amount for the accurate alignment.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-464

Sub code
0
1
2

Applied to
Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 330 mm or longer
Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 220 mm to 329 mm
Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 219 mm or shorter

An envelope should be placed lengthwise (R direction).

Description
As the set value is increased, the envelope aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as
it is decreased, the envelope aligning amount becomes decreased.
*
*

Default: 10
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing

If an envelope cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller of the bypass tray and if
this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the envelope aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the
defective print image.
If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 37

05-466
Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind
Purpose
When paper is fed from the bypass tray, it is transported with the registration (aligning) roller. At the
same time, the feed roller is also driven to support the paper transport to the registration (aligning) roller
(by pushing the paper from behind). This code is used to adjust the time of pushing the paper from
behind, to ensure that paper is securely fed.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-466

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Applied to
Bypass tray, when plain paper mode is used to feed
Bypass tray, when post card mode is used to feed
Reserved
Bypass tray, when envelope mode is used to feed
Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed
Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed
Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed
Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed

Description
As the set value is increased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes longer and the amount of
pushing the paper from behind becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the driving
time of the feed roller becomes shorter and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes
decreased.
*
*

Default: 0
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0 to 128: No pushing, 255: Maximum amount of pushing)

Adjustment Timing
Particularly when thick paper is fed from the bypass tray, if it is not fully pulled to the registration roller
and the following error occurs, perform this adjustment to further push the paper from behind.
Error code: E010 (Leading edge of paper stops at the registration roller)

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38

05-497
Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation
Purpose
This code is used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning
direction, to fit the side deviation in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-497

Sub code
0
1
2
3
5

Applied to
Drawer side deviation
PFU drawer side deviation
PFP upper drawer side deviation
PFP lower drawer side deviation
Bypass tray side deviation

Sub codes 2 and 3 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing position is shifted toward the end point (the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is
shifted toward the start point (the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction.
*
*

Default: 128
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

Key in 1, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in 1 and press the [START] button to print a
grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left
edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified
range, 52 mm 0.5 mm.
Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.
When the set value is decreased

Appropriate printing position

When the set value is increased

Primary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

Adjustment Timing
After the following parts are replaced and when an adjustment is necessary because there is a side
deviation.
- Drawer
- PFU drawer - PFP upper drawer - PFP lower drawer - Bypass tray

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 39

Caution

Basically, do not perform deviation adjustments for the drawer (05-497-0) and PFU drawer (05-4971). When adjustments of the drawer and PFU drawer are necessary, perform the adjustments using
"Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)."
Perform the "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" prior to this adjustment.
The primary scanning laser writing start position adjusted in "Adjustment of primary scanning laser
writing start position (05-411)" is the benchmark and the drawer side deviation (05-497) is the
adjustment used to correct this benchmark.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40

05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847
Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting)
(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
*
*

Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the manual density mode is
used.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-501
05-503
05-504
05-700
05-710
05-714
05-845
05-846
05-847

Applied to
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Text mode
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple
binary threshold adjustment.)
Text/photo mode
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy

Fax

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to the center
in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
However, in Text mode with Fax Function (05-700), as the set value is increased, the image density
becomes lower, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it
is decreased, the image density becomes higher.
*
*

Default: 05-501/503/504: 128, 05-700: 120, 05-710/714/845 to 847: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the center density set value in manual density mode
during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 41

05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852


Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting)
(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
*
*

Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the density slider is set to the "lighter" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is
intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-505
05-506
05-507
05-701
05-715
05-719
05-850
05-851
05-852

Applied to
Text/Photo mode
Photo mode
Text mode
Text mode
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple
binary threshold adjustment.)
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy

Fax

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes stronger (much lighter)
when the density level is set to "lighter" side. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes weaker (less lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side.
*
*

Default: 33
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Darkest, 255: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to
"lighter" side, during the copy/ fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution

If the set value is too large, the adjustment for -1 or more may not be performed when the manual
density level is set to "lighter" side.
If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42

05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857


Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting)
(Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
*
*

Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.
Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the density slider is set to the "darker" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is
intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-508
05-509
05-510
05-702
05-720
05-724
05-855
05-856
05-857

Applied to
Text/Photo mode
Photo mode
Text mode
Text mode
(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.)
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy

Fax

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to "darker"
side in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
*
*

Default: 33
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to
"darker" side, during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution

If the set value is too large, the adjustment for +1 or more may not be performed when the manual
density level is set to "darker" side.
If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 43

05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862
Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/
Scanner Function)
*

Codes 05-725 and 729 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the automatic density
mode is used.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-512
05-514
05-515
05-725
05-729
05-860
05-861
05-862

Applied to

Function mode
Copy

Photo mode
Text/Photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Fax
Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher in automatic density mode. On the
other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
*
*

Default: 128
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the image density in automatic density mode during
the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution
If the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44

05-532 to 534/835 to 837


Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the background peak of the range correction during the copy/scan
operation. By adjusting the background peak, an image becomes much whiter because pixels judged
as "white" are increased.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-532
05-533
05-534
05-835
05-836
05-837

Applied to
Text/Photo mode
Photo mode
Text mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy[

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the image background is not printed out. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the image background is not deleted but remains.
*
*

Default: 05-532: 32, 05-533: 22, 05-534: 46, 05-835: 32, 05-836: 46, 05-837: 16
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image white during the copy/scan operation
when necessary.

Caution

Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, depending on the
adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.
The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in
"Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."
The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in
"Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 45

05-535 to 537/820 to 822


Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the text peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation.
By adjusting the text peak, an image becomes much blacker because pixels judged as "black" are
increased.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-535
05-536
05-537
05-820
05-821
05-822

Applied to
Text/Photo mode
Photo mode
Text mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the entire image becomes white. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the entire image becomes black.
*
*

Default: 05-535: 246, 05-536: 254, 05-537: 236, 05-820: 246, 05-821: 236, 05-822: 254
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the image black during the copy/scan operation
when necessary.

Caution

Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, and a dark area may
be blurred, depending on the adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.
The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."
The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46

05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832


Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background peak and text peak to fixed/varied, by specifying the
range correction method during the copy/scan operation. Once fixed peak is selected, the range correction is performed with the fixed values. The value of the background peak affects the reproducibility
of the image background density. On the other hand, the value of the text peak affects the reproducibility of the text density.
Perform this adjustment under the use conditions of the original glass, ADF and RADF in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-570
05-571
05-572
05-693
05-694
05-695
05-825
05-826
05-827
05-830
05-831
05-832

Applied to
The original glass is used, text/photo mode
The original glass is used, photo mode
The original glass is used, text mode
The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode
The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode
The ADF/RADF is used, text mode
The original glass is used, text/photo mode
The original glass is used, text mode
The original glass is used, photo mode
The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode
The ADF/RADF is used, text mode
The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode

Function mode
Copy[

Scanner

Description
When these codes are used, the range correction method is specified by the one's and ten's place.
Allocated in the one's place is for the automatic density mode, and the ten's place for manual density
mode.
Setting range for each digit is as shown below:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
e.g. When the set value is "22," "the background peak is varied and the text peak is fixed" in both
automatic density mode and manual density mode.
*
*

Default: 05-570: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-571: 12, 05-572: 22, 05-693: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05694: 12, 05-695: 22, 05-825 to 827, 830 to 832: 12
Acceptable values: 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 31 to 34, 41 to 44

Adjustment Timing
Perform this adjustment to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density and the text density.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 47

05-593 to 595
Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to adjust image contrast by correcting the gamma data slope during the copy
operation.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-593
05-594
05-595

Applied to
Copy function, text/photo mode
Copy function, photo mode
Copy function, text mode

Description
As the set value is increased, the image contrast becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the image contrast becomes lower.
*
*

Default: 5
Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (0: Lowest contrast, 9: Highest contrast)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image contrast during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48

05-596 to 599
Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function)
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the gamma balance of the image density in three areas, low, medium,
and high density areas, when the network printer function is used.
Perform this adjustment in each halftone mode for each emulation by density area.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-596

05-597

05-598

05-599

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
Smooth mode, low density area
Smooth mode, medium density area
Smooth mode, high density area
Detail mode, low density area
Detail mode, medium density area
Detail mode, high density area
Smooth mode, low density area
Smooth mode, medium density area
Smooth mode, high density area
Detail mode, low density area
Detail mode, medium density area
Detail mode, high density area

Emulation
PS

PCL

Description
As the set value is increased, the image density in the intended adjustment density area becomes
higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.
Turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then perform the printer operation to check the image quality.
*
*

Default: 128
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
Use these codes to check the image when the network printer function is used, and perform this adjustment.

Caution
The density of light text or a graphic image varies, if the medium or high density area is mainly
adjusted. It is not affected, if the low density area is adjusted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 49

05-600 to 602/869 to 871


Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
These codes are used to switch the background adjustment data and adjust the background density
during the copy/scan operation.
Perform this adjustment in each original mode.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-600
05-601
05-602
05-869
05-870
05-871

Applied to
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode
Text/photo mode
Text mode
Photo mode

Function mode
Copy

Scanner

Description
As the set value is increased, the background becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased,
the background becomes darker.
*
*

Default: 05-600 to 602: 3, 05-869: 4, 05-870: 6, 05-871: 4


Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (1: Darker background (reproduced), 9: Lighter background (eliminated))

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density.

Caution

If the adjustment is performed to make the background lighter, a light area becomes lighter or eliminated. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.
The background density for the copy function may not vary so much, depending on "Range correction background peak adjustment (05-532 to 534)" and "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to
695)".

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50

05-609
Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)
Purpose
This code is used to switch the gamma table when paper is scanned from the ADF/RADF during the
copy/fax transmission/scan operation. This code is used to adjust the image quality when an original is
scanned from the ADF/RADF, to the one when the original is scanned from the original glass.

Description
As the set value is increased within the range between 1 and 4 except the default (0), the image
becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image becomes darker.
*
*

Default: 0 (Equivalent to the medium density between when the set value is 3 and when it is 4)
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (1: Darkest, 4: Lightest)

Adjustment Timing
Use this code to adjust the image quality when necessary, if there is a visible difference in density when
the image is scanned from the original glass and when it is scanned from the ADF/RADF.

Caution
The original seen through the back of the page may be printed, and text handwritten with a pencil, light
text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, when the ADF/RADF is used. Therefore, carefully perform
the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 51

05-620 to 623/865 to 867


Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)
Purpose
Theses codes are used to reset the filtering processing (a process performed to enhance edge of
image data) intensity during the copy/scan operation, to make the image sharper or softer.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-620
05-621
05-622
05-623
05-865

Sub code
0
1
2

05-866

05-867

0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
Text/photo mode
Photo mode, error diffusion
Text mode
Photo mode, dither
Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to
40%
Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to
80%
Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to
100%
Text mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%
Text mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%
Text mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%
Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%
Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%
Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%

Function mode
Copy

Scanner

Description
When these codes are used, the filtering intensity is specified by the one's and the ten's place. The
one's place is fixed in each original mode. As the ten's place is increased, a sharper image is printed.
As it is decreased, a softer image is printed. Also, as it is decreased, moir is less likely to occur.
One's place (filter shape):
Fixed value (Filter for each original mode selected)
Ten's place (sharpness intensity):
0 (sharpness at default)
1 to 9 (1: Softest, 9: Sharpest)
*
*

Default: 05-620: EUR/UC: 1, JPN: 0, 05-621/623: 0, 05-865 to 867: 0


Acceptable values (ten's place): 0 to 9

Adjustment Timing

At the request of a user, perform this adjustment to make the image sharper or softer during the
copy operation when necessary.
Perform this adjustment if insufficient sharpness adjustment causes degradation in the image quality
(moir, insufficient sharpness).

Caution
If the set value in the ten's place is too large, moir is more likely to occur on the printout. On the other
hand, if it is too small, the image may be blurred (insufficient sharpness). Therefore, perform this adjustment to acquire the optimum image quality, while checking the printout.
e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

05-648/654/655
Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer Function)
*

Codes 05-645/655 are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to prevent smudged/faint text when the copy/network printer function is used to
print.
Perform this adjustment in each function mode regarding the following items:
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-648
05-654
05-655

Applied to
Text/photo mode
PS printing
PCL printing

Function mode
Copy[
Printer^

Description
As the set value is increased, the faint text is suppressed. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the
smudged text is suppressed.
When performing this adjustment for the printer function, turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then
perform the printer operation to check the printout.
*
*

Default (copy function): 05-648: 3


Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (0: Maximum smudged text suppression, 4: Maximum faint text suppression)

*
*

Default (printer function): 05-654/655: 5


Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (0: Maximum faint text suppression, 9: Maximum smudged text suppression)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to suppress the smudged/faint text and thin lines, when the
copy/network printer function is used to print.

Caution
Note that the image quality and life of replacement parts may not meet the specifications when a value
other than the default is set.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 53

05-664/665
Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function)
*

These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the upper limit of the printing density when the network printer function
is used to print in toner save mode. By making the printing density lower, toner can be saved.
Perform this adjustment in printer mode regarding the following items:
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code
05-664
05-665

Applied to
PS printing
PCL printing

Description
As the set value is increased, the printing density becomes higher in toner save mode. On the other
hand, as it is decreased, the printing density becomes lower.
*
*

Default: 136
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density during the print operation in toner save
mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

05-667/672/676/678
Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)
*
*
*

Code 05-676 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


Code 05-676 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.
Code 05-678 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the dot size by specifying the width of laser pulse, which is assigned to
the beam levels. This is used for 4 divided smoothing (a process to reproduce smooth text and thin
lines) when the copy/printer/fax reception function is used to print. The primary scanning direction is
divided into four and the dot width is set at five levels including level "0."
Perform this adjustment in function mode regarding the following items:
The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:
Code

Sub code

05-667

0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4

05-672

05-676

05-678

Applied to
Beam level 0/4
Beam level 1/4
Beam level 2/4
Beam level 3/4
Beam level 4/4
GDI printing, beam level 0/4
GDI printing, beam level 1/4
GDI printing, beam level 2/4
GDI printing, beam level 3/4
GDI printing, beam level 4/4
PS/PCL printing, beam level 0/4
PS/PCL printing, beam level 1/4
PS/PCL printing, beam level 2/4
PS/PCL printing, beam level 3/4
PS/PCL printing, beam level 4/4
Beam level 0/4
Beam level 1/4
Beam level 2/4
Beam level 3/4
Beam level 4/4

Function
mode
Copy

Printer

Fax

Description
As the set value is decreased, the beam width in the primary scanning direction becomes smaller and
dots are reproduced in smaller size.
*

Default:
05-667-0: 0, 05-667-1: 19, 05-667-2: 25, 05-667-3: 31, 05-667-4: 44
05-672-0: 0, 05-672-1: 19, 05-672-2: 25, 05-672-3: 31, 05-672-4: 56
05-676-0: 0, 05-676-1: 19, 05-676-2: 25, 05-676-3: 31, 05-676-4: 44
05-678-0: 0, 05-678-1: 19, 05-678-2: 25, 05-678-3: 31, 05-678-4: 44
Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Smallest dots, 255: Largest dots)

Adjustment Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to make the dot size in the primary scanning direction smaller,
when copy/printer or fax function is used.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 55

Caution

Set the values to match the order of beam levels to the large and small set values. (Set the maximum value for beam level 4/4 and the minimum value for beam level 0/4.)
The adjustment of beam level 4 affects the dot size the most.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56

3. Code in Setting Mode 08


List of 08 Setting Code
Code
08-202
08-203
08-204
08-205
08-206
08-209
08-219
08-224 to 228
08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471
08-246
08-250
08-251
08-252
08-253
08-254
08-255
08-258
08-260
08-261
08-263
08-265
08-266
08-273
08-274
08-276
08-281
08-283
08-284
08-285
08-286
08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979
08-300
08-305 to 308
08-312 to 314
08-315/316
08-320 to 323
08-327 to 329
08-330/332
08-335

Content
Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller
Device
Equipment Adjustment Mode Display
Auto-Clear Timer Setting
Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting
Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode)
Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing
Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files
(Scanner Function)
Paper Size
Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction)
Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear
Service Technician Telephone Number
Setting Value of PM Counter
Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing
Error History Display
LT<->A4/LD<->A3
PFP Installation
FSMS Acceptance
Web Data Retention Period
Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray
Administrator's Password
Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing
Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting
E-mail
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting
Internet FAX
Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner
Function)
Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function)
Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function)
Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner
Function)
Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner
Function)
Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function)
Raw Print Job
Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function)
Print Counter Display (by Paper Size)
Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size)
Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX
Function
Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size)
Scan Counter Display
Display of Number of Transmitted/Received
Pages in FAX Function
Display of Total Number of Pages

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Page
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-40
3-41
3-43
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-1

Code
08-345
08-346
08-347/353
08-348/349
08-352
08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411
08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/
1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/
1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
08-381
08-388/389
08-400
08-404/405
08-407/411
08-409/448
08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521
08-414
08-424/425
08-433/800/801/802/804/896
08-439 to 441/523/526
08-455
08-462
08-463
08-476/536/537/539
08-480
08-481
08-482
08-483
08-486
08-502
08-510
08-515/516
08-525/527/540/541
08-535
08-538
08-550
08-603
08-604
08-611
08-615
08-617
08-618

Content
Count Setting of Envelope (PM)
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM)
Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee
Charging System Counter)
Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency
Film (PM)
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging
System Counter)
Drawer Counter Display
PM Management Setting

Page
3-50
3-51
3-52

External Counter Function


Copying Total Counter
Fuser Unit Error Status Counter
Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State
Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State
Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode
Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by
Paper Type)
Toner Density Correction Switching
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in
Ready State
Temperature Control Lower Limit
Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper
Type)
Toner Supply Amount Correction
Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy MixedSized Original on RADF (A/B Format)
Light Control Status
Temperature Drop Setting during Printing
Default Setting of Paper Source
Automatic Paper Source Selection
Feeding Retry
Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor
Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor PreRunning Rotation
Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode
Automatic FAX Transmission
Temperature Setting during Warming-up
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during
Printing
Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing
(Temperature/Time)
Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy
Function)
Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function)
Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy
Function)
APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function)
Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function)
Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory
Print Setting without Department Code (Printer
Function)
Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy
Function)

3-59
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56

3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-73
3-74
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-83
3-84
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-91
3-92
3-93
3-94

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-2

Code
08-631
08-638
08-641
08-642
08-649
08-650
08-655
08-660/661
08-666
08-669
08-672
08-684/686
08-685
08-690
08-691
08-693
08-695
08-698
08-699
08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to
730/772/773/780 to 790/796
08-712/713/714
08-767 to 771/775 to 778
08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867
08-830/868/869
08-831/870/871
08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863
08-838
08-839
08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884
08-886
08-900/906
08-905
08-921/1951
08-922/923
08-945
08-947
08-949
08-970
08-971
08-973
08-995
08-1002

Content
Custom Mode Setting
Time Differences
Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using
ADF/RADF) (Copy Function)
Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function)
Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function)
2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy
Function)
Reset 05/08 Codes
Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail
BOX Partition Clearing
System All Clearing
Initialization of Department Management Information
Rebuilding Databases
Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation
CF Formatting
Template Function Setting
Initialization of NIC Information
Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports
Embedded IC chip)
Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit
Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit
TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System
(RDMS) Related Setting
250 sheets limitation for output pages
Service Notification Function Setting
Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/
Fax Function)
Transfer DC Correction
Separation DC Output Correction
Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax
Function)
Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching
Correction by Temperature/Humidity
Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State
(Temperature/Time)
ROM Version Display
Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at
Duplex Copying
FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section
Software Version Display
Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display
Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF
Initialization when Software is Upgraded
Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting
Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver
Mode
Toner Near Empty Threshold Value
PCL Line Feed Code Setting
Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display
Selection of NIC Board Status Information

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Page
3-95
3-96
3-97
3-98
3-99
3-101
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
3-106
3-107
3-108
3-109
3-110
3-111
3-112
3-113
3-114
3-115
3-118
3-119
3-120
3-122
3-123
3-124
3-126
3-127
3-128
3-129
3-130
3-131
3-132
3-133
3-134
3-135
3-136
3-137
3-138
3-139
3-140
3-141

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-3

Code
08-1003
08-1006 to 1010/1112
08-1011/1012
08-1013
08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105
08-1017 to 1019
08-1020
08-1024/1025
08-1026 to 1029
08-1030 to 1032
08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111
08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098
08-1055
08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099
08-1073/1074
08-1075 to 1077
08-1078 to 1088
08-1093 to 1096
08-1114
08-1123
08-1124
08-1141
08-1144
08-1149
08-1372
08-1378
08-1380
08-1382
08-1385/1386/1388
08-1410
08-1428
08-1440
08-1447
08-1448
08-1449
08-1450
08-1451
08-1628
08-1882
08-1913
08-1952 to 1955
08-1960 to 1979
08-1989
08-1990
08-1991

Content
Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
Availability of NCP Burst
AppleTalk
DNS
DDNS Desired Level
Name of WINS Server
NetWare
HTTP
SMTP
POP3
FTP
SNMP
Raw TCP Print
LPD Print
IPP Print
NetWare Print
Text Transmission of Internet FAX
NT Domain ON/OFF Setting
Workgroup Name
Display of MAC Address
Processing in the event of Memory Full Error
Enhanced Bold for PCL6
Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating
Counter Display / 0 Cleaning
Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning
Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning
Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time
Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing
Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number
Counter / 0 Cleaning
Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter
Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing
IP Conflict Detect
IPP admin Name
IPP admin Password
IPP authentication method
User name for IPP authentication
Password for IPP authentication
Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum
Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount
Initialization of the Scan Memory Area
Function Clear LED Flashing
Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version
Display
IP Address Range for IP Filter
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Domain Name Server Option (6)
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP
The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option
(44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name
Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

Page
3-142
3-143
3-144
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-148
3-149
3-150
3-151
3-152
3-154
3-155
3-156
3-158
3-159
3-160
3-162
3-163
3-164
3-165
3-166
3-167
3-168
3-169
3-170
3-171
3-172
3-173
3-174
3-175
3-176
3-177
3-178
3-179
3-180
3-181
3-182
3-183
3-184
3-185
3-186
3-187
3-188
3-189

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-4

Code
08-1993
08-1994
08-1996

Content
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail
Server Address
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server
Address
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server
Address

Page
3-190
3-191
3-192

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-5

08-202
Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller Device
Purpose
The equipment can be equipped with external counters, such as a coin controller, copy key card, and
key copy counter. With any of these counters installed, it is required to use this code to have the equipment detect a type of the counter installed.

Description
When this code is used, a type of counter installed on the equipment is detected.
0: No external copy counter/controller device
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
3: Key copy counter
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
When any of the above counters is installed on the equipment or when any of the above counter types
is changed, use this code to reset the set value.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-6

08-203
Equipment Adjustment Mode Display
Purpose
There are two types of modes; shipment adjustment mode used in the field after a factory shipment and
a line adjustment mode used before a factory shipment. This code is used to check in which adjustment
mode the equipment is set.
Since the shipment adjustment mode is set for the field, it is not necessary to perform this code. Leave
the default (factory shipment adjustment mode).

Description
When this code is used, the adjustment mode of the equipment (adjustment mode for factory shipment
/ line adjustment mode) can be checked.
0: For factory shipment
1: For line
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the adjustment mode of the equipment.

Caution
Leave the default ("0" for factory shipment) for this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-7

08-204
Auto-Clear Timer Setting
Purpose
If no button is pressed for a certain period of time during or after the copy operation, etc., the auto-clear
function will automatically reset the current copy settings to the default settings and display the basic
screen. This code is used to reset a desired period of time until the auto-clear function starts up.

Description
When this code is used, a period of time from the last button operation until the start-up of the autoclear function is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the auto-clear function
starts up becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter.
When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled.
0: Auto-clear function disabled
1: 15 seconds 6: 90 seconds
2: 30 seconds 7: 105 seconds
3: 45 seconds 8: 120 seconds
4: 60 seconds 9: 135 seconds
5: 75 seconds 10: 150 seconds
* Default: 3 (45 seconds)
*

11: 180 seconds


12: 210 seconds
13: 240 seconds
14: 270 seconds
15: 300 seconds

On the e-STUDIO165/205, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up is set according
to the following operation:
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] -->
[AUTO CLEAR]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Clear]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up or
to disable the auto-clear function.

Caution
When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled. The current settings (displayed on the control
panel) applied to the last operation are retained until the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3-8

08-205
Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting
Purpose
Energy saver mode is intended to automatically lower the temperature of the fuser unit in order to
reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time.
This code is used to enable energy saver mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment
switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the
equipment switches to energy saver mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time
until the equipment switches to energy saver mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is
decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "0" is set, energy saver mode is disabled.
e-STUDIO163/203:
0: Disabled
1: Reserved
2: 1 minute
3: Reserved
4: 2 minutes
5: Reserved
6: 4 minutes
* Default: 11

7: Reserved
8: 5 minutes
9: Reserved
10: 10 minutes
11: 15 minutes
12: 20 minutes

13: 25 minutes
14: 30 minutes
15: 35 minutes
16: 40 seconds
17: 45 seconds
18: 50 minutes

19: 55 minutes
20: 60 minutes
21: 70 minutes
22: 80 minutes
23: 90 minutes
24: 100 minutes

25: 110 minutes


26: 120 minutes
27: 150 minutes
28: 180 minutes
29: 210 minutes
30: 240 minutes

e-STUDIO165/205:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* Default: 1
* The period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode is set according to the following operation:
The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[TIMERS] --> [AUTO POWER SAVE]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Power Save]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the
one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period
of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver
mode.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3-9

08-206
Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode)
Purpose
Sleep mode is intended to automatically turn the fuser unit OFF in order to reduce power consumption,
when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable
sleep mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.
However, power is supplied to the optional boards including the FAX Kit and Network Printer Kit in
sleep mode, therefore, the equipment starts up when a fax is received or a request to print from the network is made.

Description
When this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the
equipment switches to sleep mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the
equipment switches to sleep mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of
time becomes shorter. In addition, when "23" is set for the e-STUDIO163/203 and 0 for the eSTUDIO165/205, sleep mode is disabled.
e-STUDIO163/203:
0: 3 minutes
6: 30 minutes
1: 5 minutes
7: 35 minutes
2: 10 minutes 8: 40 minutes
3: 15 minutes 9: 45 minutes
4: 20 minutes 10: 50 minutes
5: 25 minutes 11: 55 minutes
* Default: 3

12: 60 minutes
13: 70 minutes
14: 80 minutes
15: 90 minutes
16: 100 seconds
17: 110 seconds

18: 120 minutes


19: 150 minutes
20: 180 minutes
21: 210 minutes
22: 240 minutes
23: Disabled

e-STUDIO165/205:
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
* Default: 1
* The period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode is set according to the following
operation:
The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.
To set on the control panel:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[TIMERS] --> [AUTO SLEEP]
To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Sleep/Auto Shut Off]

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.

Caution
If the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the
one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period
of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver
mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10

08-209
Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and
used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the
scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 11

08-219
Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and
used by priority, when the scanner function is used to store the scanned original data in a shared folder.

Description
When this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF
2: Reserved
3: TIFF (Single)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the
scanned original data is stored in a shared folder.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12

08-224 to 228
Paper Size
*

Codes 08-225, 227 and 228 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of paper loaded in each drawer and the
bypass tray. This allows the APS (Automatic Paper Selection), paper transport and jam detection to be
performed, depending on paper size.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-224
08-225
08-226
08-227
08-228

Applied to
Paper size for the bypass tray
Paper size for the drawer
Paper size for the PFU drawer
Paper size for the PFP upper drawer
Paper size for the PFP lower drawer

Description
When these codes are used, the equipment detects the size of paper loaded in each paper source.
Set value = Size of paper to be loaded
0: A3
4: B4
8: LT-R
12:COMP
1: A4
5: B5
9: LD
13: FOLIO
2: A4-R
6: B5-R
10: LG
14: Non-standard
3: A5-R
7: LT
11: ST-R
15: Postcard
* 14 and 15 can be selected only for the paper size for the bypass tray (08-224).
*

Default:
Bypass tray:
Drawer:
PFU Drawer:
PFP upper Drawer:
PFP lower Drawer:

14 (No particular size is specified)


UC: 7, Others: 1
UC: 7, Others: 1
UC: 7, Others: 1
UC: 7, Others: 1

The paper size is set on the control panel according to the following operation:
e-STUDIO163/203:
Press [DRAWER] + [COPY] for two seconds --> [DRAWER] --> [COPY]
e-STUDIO165/205:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] -->
[DRAWER SIZE]

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the paper size for each drawer.

Caution
If the paper size different from the actual size of paper loaded is set for 08-225 to 228, a jam may occur
and the back of paper may be smudged.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 13

08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471


Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction)
*

Codes 08-337 to 341 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of each type of paper in mm in the feeding
direction and widthwise direction.
The values set here are also used to define the range of an image printed on paper.
* Paper feeding is controlled based on the paper size selected; therefore, the actual paper size must
correspond with the set value. Unless the actual paper size corresponds with the set value, a jam
may be generated during the paper feed operation.

Description
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-229
08-230
08-231
08-232
08-233
08-234
08-235
08-236
08-237
08-238
08-239
08-240
08-241
08-242
08-244
08-245
08-337
08-338
08-339
08-340
08-341
08-471

Applied to
Paper size (A3-R)
Paper size (A4-R)
Paper size (A5-R)
Paper size (B4)
Paper size (B5-R)
Paper size (LT-R)
Paper size (LD)
Paper size (LG)
Paper size (ST-R)
Paper size (COMPUTER)
Paper size (FOLIO)
Paper size (13 LG)
Paper size (8.5 x 8.5)
Paper size (Non-standard)
Paper size (8K)
Paper size (16K-R)
Paper size (Envelope: COM10-R)
Paper size (Envelope: DL-R)
Paper size (Envelope: Monarch-R)
Paper size (Envelope: CHO-3-R)
Paper size (Envelope: YOU-3-R)
Paper size (Postcard)

Default
(Feeding/ widthwise)
420/297
297/210
210/148
364/257
257/182
279/216
432/279
356/216
216/140
356/257
330/210
330/216
216/216
432/279
390/270
270/195
241/105
220/110
191/98
235/120
235/105
148/100

Acceptable
value
140 to 432

105 to 432
140 to 432
140 to 432
105 to 432
105 to 432
98 to 432
105 to 432
105 to 432
100 to 432

The value for each code in the feeding direction and widthwise direction varies according to sub
code. (0: Feeding direction, 1: Widthwise direction)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use a special paper size (other than that listed in the above table) in each
drawer (this operation is not guaranteed).

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14

08-246
Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to clear the copy job entered, when the auto-clear period of
time passes while the copy operation is suspended.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically clear the copy job is reset.
0: Does not clear
1: Clears
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to automatically clear the copy job.

Caution
No copy job is cleared even if the auto-clear period of time passes during the menu operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 15

08-250
Service Technician Telephone Number
Purpose
When a service call appears, a telephone number of a service technician can be displayed on the control panel. No telephone number is displayed by default. This code is used to enter and display the telephone number.

Description
When this code is used, a telephone number of a service technician is entered, and displayed on the
screen when a service call appears.
Set value = Telephone number of a service technician
*
*

Acceptable value: 20-digit numeric value


Default: 0 (No telephone number is displayed)

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the telephone number when a service call appears.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16

08-251
Setting Value of PM Counter
Purpose
The Preventive Maintenance (PM) needs to be performed to clean the parts, lubricate the driving units
and replace consumables. This code is used to specify the PM cycle (copy counts). At the moment
when the PM counter value of "Current value of PM counter display/0 clearing (08-252)" reaches the
set value for the code, the message will appear, prompting for the PM.

Description
When this code is used, the PM cycle (copy counts) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.
Set value = Copy counts prompting for the PM
0: Message will not appear, prompting for the PM
1 to 99999999 (copy counts)
* Default:
e-STUDIO163: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000
e-STUDIO165: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: JPN: 0, Others: 90,000

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM cycle.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 17

08-252
Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing
Purpose
The PM counter is intended to count the number of copies as a guide for estimating the next PM (Preventive Maintenance) timing. This code is used to display and to check the current PM counter value for
estimating the general PM timing. In addition, when "0" is set after the PM is performed, the counter will
be reset to 0 and incremented again, which helps to estimate the next PM timing.

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the PM counter is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.
Note that only "0" can be manually entered to reset the PM counter to 0, after the PM is performed.
0: Clear the counter
1 to 99999999 (copy counts)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the current counter value to 0, after the PM is performed.

Caution

Reset the counter to 0, only after performing the PM. Otherwise, the next PM timing cannot be accurately estimated. The image quality may be reduced and some failure may occur in the equipment.
The PM counter value is stored in the SRAM board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18

08-253
Error History Display
Purpose
During the equipment operation, if an error occurs, the type of error, time when the error occurred, current reproduction ratio and paper source for recording paper, etc., are stored as error data. This code is
used to display data for the last 8 errors on the control panel in order to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error.

Description
When this code is used, data for the last 8 errors are listed on the screen. Error data is shown, as indicated below:
EA10
Error code
*

064
064
2 3 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
MMM
NNN
A BCD EF H I J L O
(3 digits) (3 digits) (11 digits)

The table below shows the descriptions of the symbols:


MMM
NNN
A
B

C
D
E
F
H
I
J
L
O

03 07 26 17 5 32
Y/M/D/H/M/S
(4 digits) (12 digits)

Reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (M x 256) + (M x 16) + M
Reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (N x 256) + (N x 16) + N
Paper source
0: Not used 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Not used 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Not used
7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7- A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: Unused
L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope) Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope)
S: CHO-3 (Envelope) T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not used
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
ADF mode
0: Not used 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not used 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not specified 1: Book 2: Double-sided /simplex printing 4: Double-sided/Duplex printing
8: Single-sided/ Duplex printing
Image shift
0: Not used 1: Book-type 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
Mode
2: Black

The error records displayed on the e-STUDIO163/203 are switched using the [ZOOM] ([25%] /
[[200%]] button.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error, for the purpose of analyzing
a cause for the error.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 19

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20

08-254
LT<->A4/LD<->A3
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the network printer function is used to print, this code is used to specify whether or not to print on
a different size of paper, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to print a document, which should be printed on LT/LD-sized
paper, on A4/A3-sized paper, is specified, unless LT/LD-sized paper is available, and vice versa.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled (A message will appear to prompt a user to use a specified size of paper.)
* Default: 0
*

This is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:


[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer] --> [LT < --> A4/LD <--> A3]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify how to print out a document when the network printer
function is used to print, unless a specified size of paper is available.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 21

08-255
PFP Installation
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the installation condition of the optional PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal).
The PFP is automatically recognized; therefore, use this code in the following cases:
Case 1:
To reset from "2: PFP dual-drawer type installed" to "1: PFP single-drawer type installed"
(When only the 2nd drawer of the PFP is broken, etc.)
Case 2:
To forcibly set to "4: Not installed" (When the 1st drawer or entire PFP is broken, etc.)
Case 3:
To install the new PFP from "4: Not installed"
(When a replacement unit is installed in the condition in Case 2, etc.)

Description
When this code is use, the installation condition of the PFP is reset.
0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically)
1: PFP single-drawer type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer type installed
3: Reserved
4: Not installed
* Default: 0
*

The PFP dual-drawer type is installed while 1 is set, 2 is automatically replaced with 1 at poweron.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the new PFP is installed.

Caution

If "0: Automatic is not set, perform this code according to the actual installation, when the PFP
installation condition is reset (Cases 1 to 3 in Purpose). If this code is not performed, the PFP is not
recognized as a setup product.
Regarding Case 3 in Purpose, remove the failed unit (disconnect electrically), in order to install a
replacement unit in the condition of Case 2. Then set to "0: Automatic (Detects installation condition
automatically)" and install the replacement unit for the PFP.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22

08-258
FSMS Acceptance
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The utility software, FSMS (Field Service Manager System) allows a service technician to download
firmware to update, via a PC connected to the equipment. Before that, it is necessary to permit the
FSMS connection.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the FSMS connection is specified. In addition, a type
of communication interface is selected.
0: Prohibited
1: Permitted (serial connection only)
2: Permitted (serial and USB connections)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to permit the FSMS connection, in order to use the FSMS to update firmware.

Caution
Connect the FSMS to the equipment while "1" is set, when the USB is used. (The communication interface is automatically switched to the USB connection during communications)

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 23

08-260
Web Data Retention Period
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
When the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time during the entry operation on
the TopAccess, data, which is being entered, is automatically reset. This code is used to set the period
of time until data is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the timeout period, which is being entered on the TopAccess, is reset. If a timeout occurs, data, which is being entered, is reset.
Set value = Timeout period
0 to 999 (minutes)
* Default: 10 (minutes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the value, which is being entered
on the TopAccess, reaches the timeout and is reset.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24

08-261
Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Description
When this code is used, the operation to fix a paper size for the bypass tray is set.
With the main switch turned OFF or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button pressed, unless a paper size is
fixed, [Non-standard] is set. If it is fixed, the paper size set for code 08-224 is set.

0: Size not fixed (bypass non-standard mode)


1: Size fixed (bypass fixed mode)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 25

08-263
Administrator's Password
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
A user (or an administrator of the equipment) authorized to access the equipment management functions on the TopAccess, is limited. This code is used to display the administrator's password, which
needs to be entered, in order to access the management functions.

Description
When this code is used, the administrator's password is displayed.
Set value = Administrator's password (6- to 10- digit numeric value)
*
*
*

Acceptable values: 0000000000 to 9999999999


Default: 123456

The administrator's password is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Administrators Password]

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the administrator's password.

Caution
If a new password is registered or reset, remember to inform the equipment administrator of the new
password.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26

08-265
Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.
If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum data capacity set for this code, an error message, which
shows exceeding file capacity, appears.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan
operation.
2 to 30 (Mbytes)
* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in
the scan operation.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error message is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 27

08-266
Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.
If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows
exceeding file capacity, appears.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the
Internet.
2 to 30 (Mbytes)
* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error message is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28

08-273
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting E-mail
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a
2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection
button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

Description
When this code is used, the e-mail transmission partial size is reset.
0: Not divided
1: 64k bytes
2: 128k bytes
3: 256k bytes
4: 512k bytes
5: 1024k bytes
6: 2048k bytes
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted
in the scan operation.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum
acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at e-mailing (08-265)" (2 to
30Mbytes).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 29

08-274
Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
When e-mail is transmitted through the Internet, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a
2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection
button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

Description
When this code is used, the Internet FAX transmission partial size is reset.
0: Not divided
1: 256k bytes
2: 512k bytes
3: 1024k bytes
4: 2048k bytes
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution
If "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum
acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX (08-266)"
(2 to 30Mbytes).

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

08-276
Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the initial value of the density adjustment button, which is used as the
default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation, is reset.
0: Automatic density
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the position of the density adjustment button, which is
used by priority, during the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 31

08-281
Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the scanning resolution, which is used as the default by priority, when the
scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.
0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
2: 300 dpi
3: 400 dpi
4: 600 dpi
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32

08-283
Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.
0: Text
1: Text/photo
2: Photo
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority, during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 33

08-284
Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the duplexing mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen
and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the duplexing mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.
0: Single
1: Book (left/right margin)
2: Tablet (top/bottom margin)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the duplexing mode, which is used by priority during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34

08-285
Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the image rotation mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting
screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is
reset.
0: 0 degree (OFF)
1: 90 degrees (ON)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during
the scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 35

08-286
Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the original size, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen
and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.
0: Automatic
1: Size mixed
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original size, which is used by priority, during the
scan operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36

08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979


Raw Print Job
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify the print properties, which are used, when a Raw print job is sent to
the printer.
The Raw print job refers to a print job, which does not contain any special print job information, such as
a print job sent to the printer when the printer driver (PCL or PS) is not used.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-290
08-291
08-292
08-293
08-296
08-297
08-298
08-299
08-978
08-979

Applied to
Duplex
Paper Size
Paper Type
Paper Orientation
Number of Form Lines
PCL Font Pitch
PCL Font Size
PCL Font Number
Drawer
PCL Symbol Set

Description
08-290: Duplex
This code is used to specify duplex printing for the Raw print job.
0: Valid (duplex) 1: Invalid (simplex)
* Default: 1
08-291: Paper Size
This code is used to specify a paper size for the Raw print job.
0: LD
4: ST
8: Reserved
12: 13 LG
1: LG
5: A3
9: B4
2: LT
6: A4
10: B5
3: COMP
7: A5
11: FOLIO
* Default: UC: 2, EUR/JPN: 6
08-292: Paper Type
This code is used to specify a paper type for the Raw print job.
0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Reserved
4: Transparency film
* Default: 0

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 37

08-293: Paper Orientation


This code is used to specify a paper orientation for the Raw print job.
0: Portrait
1: Landscape
* Default: 0
08-296: Number of Form Lines
This code is used to specify the line feed width.
500 to 12,800: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)
* Default: 1,200 (12 points)
08-297: PCL Font Pitch
This code is used to specify the number of characters per inch, when the fixed-pitch font is used.
44 to 9,999: Unit: 1/100 CPI (character per inch)
* Default: 1,000 (10 CPI)
08-298: PCL Font Size
This code is used specify the font size, when the proportional font is used
400 to 99,975: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)
* Default: 1,200 (12 points)
08-299: PCL Font Number
This code is used to specify a PCL font number used for the Raw print job.
0 to 79
* Default: 0 (Courier is used.)
08-978: Drawer Display
This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.
0: AUTO
1: Drawer
2: PFU drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
* Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

08-979: Symbol Set Display


This code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.
0: Roman-8
20: Pi Font
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
21: Legal
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
22: ISO 4: United Kingdom
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
23: ISO 6:ASCII
4: PC-8, Code Page 437
24: ISO 11
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian
25: ISO 15: Italian
6: PC-850, Multilingual
26: ISO 17
7: PC-852, Latin2
27: ISO 21: German
8: PC-8 Turkish
28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
29: ISO 69: French
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
31: MC Text
12: DeskTop
32: PC Cyrillic
13: PS Text
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
14: Ventura International
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
15: Ventura US
35: PC-775
16: Microsoft Publishing
36: PC-1004
17: Math-8
37: Symbol
18: PS Math
38: Windows Baltic
19: Ventura Math
39: Wingdings
* Default: 0
*

The above Raw print jobs are set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to reset the print properties for the Raw print job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 39

08-300
Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the maximum copy count when multiple copies are made per job.

Description
When this code is used, the maximum copy count per job is specified.
Set value = Maximum copy count
0: 999
1: 99
2: 9
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum copy count per job.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

08-305 to 308
Print Counter Display (by Paper Size)
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (print counts) of the print counters
(copy counter, Fax counter, printer counter and list counter) by paper size. This is done according to
"Count setting of large size paper (08-352)" and "Definition setting of large size paper (08-353)."
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Copy counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code
08-305

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13 LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Copy

[Printer counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code
08-306

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Printer

[List counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code
08-307

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Function mode
Printer

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 41

[Fax counter (by paper size): Print counts]


Code
08-308

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each print counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is
calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value.
Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

08-312 to 314
Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size)
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (scan counts) of the scan counters
(copy counter, network counter and Fax counter) by paper size.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Copy counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code
08-312

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Copy

[Scanner counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code
08-313

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Scanner

[Fax counter (by paper size): Scan counts]


Code
08-314

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Function mode
Fax

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 43

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

Caution
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

08-315/316
Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to check by displaying the current values (transmission/reception counts) of the
Fax communication counters by paper size.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Fax transmission counter (by paper size): Fax transmission counts]


Code
08-315

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Fax

[Fax reception counter (by paper size): Fax reception counts]


Code
08-316

Sub code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Applied to
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG

Sub code
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Applied to
LT
ST
COMP
13" LG
8.5" x 8.5"
16K
8K
Others

Function mode
Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to
an 8 digit numeric value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmission/reception count is calculated.

Caution
Although the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value.
Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 45

08-320 to 323
Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size)
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The print counters include a copy counter, a printer counter, a list counter and a Fax counter. Each
counter is intended to accumulate print counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used
to display and check the current value of each print counter.
* The print counters can also be displayed by the operation on the control panel.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-320

08-321

08-322

08-323

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
Copy counter (large size)
Copy counter (small size)
Copy counter (total)
Printer counter (large size)
Printer counter (small size)
Printer counter (total)
List counter (large size)
List counter (small size)
List counter (total)
Fax counter (large size)
Fax counter (small size)
Fax counter (total)

Function mode
Fax

Printer

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size:
The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.
Large size:
The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
printed.
However, the print counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size
paper is printed.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)
Total:
The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is
calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

08-327 to 329
Scan Counter Display
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The scan counters include a copy counter, a scanner counter, and a Fax counter. Each counter is
intended to accumulate scan counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display
and check the current value of each scan counter.
* Scan counts of each counter can be displayed by the operation on the control panel. However, these
codes are used to display scan counts by small/large size.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-327

08-328

08-329

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
Copy counter (large size)
Copy counter (small size)
Copy counter (total)
Fax counter (large size)
Fax counter (small size)
Fax counter (total)
Scanner counter (large size)
Scanner counter (small size)
Scanner counter (total)

Function mode
Copy

Fax

Scanner

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric
value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size:
The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is scanned.
Large size:
The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
scanned.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
Total:
The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is
calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 47

08-330/332
Display of Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The Fax counters include a transmission and a reception counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate Fax transmission/reception counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current values of Fax transmission/reception counters.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-330

08-332

Sub code
0
1
2
0
1
2

Applied to
Fax transmission counts (large size)
Fax transmission counts (small size)
Fax transmission counts (total)
Fax reception counts (large size)
Fax reception counts (small size)
Fax reception counts (total)

Function mode
Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to
an 8 digit numeric value.
*
*

0 to 99999999
Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.


Small size:
The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small
size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is transmitted/
received by Fax.
Large size:
The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large
size paper is transmitted/received by Fax.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
Total:
The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmission/reception count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48

08-335
Display of Total Number of Pages
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The counter is intended to accumulate print counts for copy printing, printer printing, Fax printing, and
list printing by paper size (small/large size). This code is used to display and check total counts by
paper size.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-335

Sub code
0
1
2

Applied to
Total counts (large size)
Total counts (small size)
Total counts (total)

Description
When this code is used, the current value of the counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. The
digital keys are used to enter the counter value.
0 to 99999999
* Default: 0
Counting conditions are as follows.
Small size:
The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper
(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.
Large size:
The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is
printed.
However, the counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper
is printed and transmitted/received.
* Large size paper setting (08-353)
* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)
Total:
The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check each counter value by paper size when the maintenance is performed or the
print count is calculated.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 49

08-345
Count Setting of Envelope (PM)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.
When the value set for "Paper size (feeding/widthwise direction) (08-337 to 341)" for an envelope,
exceeds the length set for "Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)," the envelope is
counted as a large size envelope.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on a large size envelope.
0: Increment the counter by 1
1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is
made on a large size envelope.

Caution

A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If
this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

08-346
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.
* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large
size paper (PM) (08-347)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on large size paper.
0: Increment the counter by 1
1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is
made on large size paper.

Caution

A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If
this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 51

08-347/353
Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee Charging System
Counter)
Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in
billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, or the counters, which are involved in the PM
such as the PM support related counters, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.
These codes are used to reset the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper.
* Whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified in accordance with "Count setting of large
size paper (08-346/352)."
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-347
08-353

Applied to
Definition setting of large size paper (PM)
Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)

Description
When these codes are used, the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper, is reset.
08-347: Definition setting of large size paper (PM)
0: A3, LD
1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP
* Default: 1
08-353: Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)
0: A3, LD
1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP, 8K
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing
conditions.

Caution
The values set for these codes affect the following counters and PM support related counters (other
than feeding).
Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347) is set to the default, for the time to perform the
PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.
Printing counter (by paper size) (08-305 to 308)
Printing counter (by large/small size) (08-320 to 323)
Scan counter (by large/small size) (08-327 to 329)
FAX counter (by large/small size) (08-330/332)
Display of total number of pages (08-335)
Key copy counter
Coin controller
Copy Key Card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

08-348/349
Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM)
Purpose
These codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related
life counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film (in transparency film
mode) or thick paper (in thick paper 1 or 2 mode).
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-348
08-349

Applied to
Count setting of thick paper (PM)
Count setting of transparency film (PM)

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a
copy or printout is made on transparency film or thick paper.
0: Increment the counter by 1
1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reset the counting condition of the life counters, when transparency film, thick paper
1 or thick paper 2 is used.

Caution

The values set for these codes affect the PM support related counters (other than feeding).
These codes are set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will
be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 53

08-352
Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing
such as the total counter and key copy counter, every time a copy or printout is made on large size
paper including a large size envelope.
* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large
size paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-353)."

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or
printout is made on large size paper.
0: Increment the counter by 1
1: Increment the counter by 2
* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing conditions.

Caution
A value set for this code affects the following counters:
Printing counter (By paper size) (08-305 to 308)
Printing counter (By large/small size) (08-320 to 323)
Scan counter (By large/small size) (08-327 to 329)
FAX counter (By large/small size) (08-330/332)
Display of total number of pages (08-335)
Key copy counter
Coin controller
Copy key card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411
Drawer Counter Display
*

Codes 08-360, 370 and 372 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The drawer counters are intended to accumulate copy counts fed from the drawers. These codes are
used to display and check the current values of the drawer counters.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-356
08-357
08-358
08-360
08-370
08-372
08-374
08-1411

Applied to
Counter display for the drawer
Counter display for the PFU drawer
Counter display for the bypass tray (other than envelope)
Counter display for the PFP upper drawer
Counter display for the PFP lower drawer
Counter display for the ADU
Counter display for the ADF/RADF
Counter display for the bypass tray (envelope)

Description
When these codes are used, the current values of the drawer counters are shown up to an 8-digit
numeric value.
0 to 99999999 (copy counts)
* Default: 0
Counting conditions are as follows.
Drawer counter:The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of paper is copied or printed,
regardless of the paper size.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check copy counts fed from the drawers, as a guide for replacing the drawer related
PM parts (such as the pick-up roller).

Caution
The drawer counter values are stored on the SRAM board. If the SRAM board is replaced, refer to the
data list in 08 SETTING code, use these codes to enter the current values, and restore the counters to
the state before the replacement of the SRAM board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 55

08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/
1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336
PM Management Setting
*

Codes 08-1312/1314/1320/1322/1328/1330 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to display each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regarding the target PM replacement parts.
Remember to clear the codes of the parts replaced after replacing them.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
[08-1150: Drum]
Code
08-1150

Sub code
0
1

3
4
6
7

Applied to
Default
Present copy counts
0
Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000
e-STUDIO203: 90,000
e-STUDIO165: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: 90,000
Present driving counts
0
Recommended driving counts for replace180,000
ment
Present copy counts for control
0
Present driving counts for control
0

Note:
Only code 08-1150 is shown in the above table. Refer to the following pages for other codes and
default values. The descriptions of "Description", "Setting Timing" and "Caution", are the same as
for code 08-1150. Therefore, they are omitted.

Description
Perform the following settings regarding the target PM parts.
Sub code 0:
This sub code is used to display the copy counts accumulated up to present.
Sub code 1:
This sub code is used to specify the recommended copy counts for replacement.
Sub code 3:
This sub code is used to display the driving counts accumulated up to present.
Sub code 4:
This sub code is used to specify the recommended driving counts for replacement.
Sub code 6:
This sub code is used to display the copy counts for control accumulated up to
present.
Sub code 7:
This sub code is used to display the driving counts for control accumulated up to
present.
Sub codes 0, 3, 6, 7:
0: Clears the counter
1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))
* Default: 0
Sub codes 1, 4:
1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))
* Default: Refer to the table.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

Setting Timing
Use these codes to display/reset each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regarding the target PM replacement parts.

Caution

The values for sub codes 0 and 6, 3 and 7 are the same.
When a value for sub code 0 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 6. When a value
for sub code 3 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 7 is updated. Likewise, when a value
for sub code 6 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 0. When a value for sub code 7 is
reset, the same value is updated for sub code 3.
When "0" is set for either of sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7, "0" is updated for all sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7.

[08-1158: Drum cleaning blade]


[08-1172: Drum separation finger]
[08-1174: Main charger grid]
[08-1182: Needle electrode]
[08-1200: Developer material]
[08-1214: Transfer charger wire]
[08-1224: Separation charger wire]
[08-1336: Recovery blade]
Code
08-1158
08-1172
08-1174
08-1182
08-1200
08-1214
08-1224
08-1336

Sub code
0
1

3
4
6
7

Applied to
Present copy counts
Recommended copy counts for replacement

Present driving counts


Recommended driving counts for replacement
Present copy counts for control
Present driving counts for control

Default
0
e-STUDIO163: 72,000
e-STUDIO203: 90,000
e-STUDIO165: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: 90,000
0
180,000
0
0

The counter for code 08-1200 is automatically cleared and replacement counts are automatically
counted up after "Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor (05-200)" is performed.

[08-1198: Ozone filter]


[08-361: Upper fuser roller bushing]
[08-1246: Fuser roller]
[08-1250: Pressure roller]
[08-1268: Fuser roller separation finger]
Code
08-361
08-1198
08-1246
08-1250
08-1268

Sub code
0
1

3
4
6
7

Applied to
Present copy counts
Recommended copy counts for replacement

Present driving counts


Recommended driving counts for replacement
Present copy counts for control
Present driving counts for control

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Default
0
e-STUDIO163: 72,000
e-STUDIO203: 90,000
e-STUDIO165: 72,000
e-STUDIO205: 90,000
0
180,000
0
0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 57

[08-1298: Feed roller (Drawer)]


[08-1300: Feed roller (PFU drawer)]
[08-1312: Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1314: Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1316: Separation roller (bypass tray)]
[08-1320: Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1322: Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1328: Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)]
[08-1330: Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)]
[08-1332: Pickup roller (bypass tray)]
Code
08-1298
08-1300
08-1312
08-1314
08-1316
08-1320
08-1322
08-1328
08-1330
08-1332

Sub code
0
1

Applied to
Present copy counts
Recommended copy counts for replacement

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

Default
0
80,000

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

08-381
External Counter Function
Purpose
This code is used to count the number of copies in each operation mode of the equipment, when the
external counter is used. (The counter set for "Externally installed copy counter / Controller device (08202)" is used as the external counter.)
Only the number of copies is counted by default when the copy function is used. However, when the
setting is changed, the numbers of copies are counted when the Fax and printer functions are used.

Description
When this code is used, the counting target operation mode is reset.
0: Not selected (Does not count)
1: Copier
2: Fax
3: Copier/Fax
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/Fax
7: Copier/Printer/Fax
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the counting target operation mode of the external
counter.

Caution
When this code is used to count the number of copies at the external counter, unless the external
counter is connected, the operation mode specified cannot be used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 59

08-388/389
Copying Total Counter
Purpose
The total counter shows important values to operate this equipment (to calculate billing amounts). In
case of any trouble, counter values are written into memory on the MAIN board and SRAM board in
parallel, to avoid losing these values. These codes are used to alternatively copy counter values on the
boards.

Description
When these codes are used, counter values are copied in the direction specified by codes entered.
08-388:This code is used to copy counter values on the MAIN board onto the SRAM board.
08-389:This code is used to copy counter values on the SRAM board onto the MAIN board.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to copy counter values onto the board where the counter values have been replaced,
after replacing the MAIN board or SRAM board.

Caution

Remember to record the current counter values before copying counter values.
Never confuse the copying direction to copy counter values on the replaced board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

08-400
Fuser Unit Error Status Counter
Purpose
When a fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45) occurs, the set value of the fuser status counter varies, depending on type of error.
Displaying and checking the set value of the fuser status counter can analyze a cause for the error. If
any of "2 to 9" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will not be operated for safety reasons.
After the fuser unit related error is resolved, if "0" is set, the fuser unit will be operated as usual. If any of
"10 to 19" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will be operated as usual, even if "0" is not set
after the fuser unit related error is resolved.
C41: Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON
C43: Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment
C44: Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
C45: Thermistor abnormality during printing
C46 to C49: Reserved

Description
When this code is used, the current set value of the fuser status counter is displayed. Only "0" can be
manually entered, in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation, after the fuser unit related
error is resolved.
For further reason why the counter value differs despite the same error code, refer to 5.1.7 or 5.1.8
[Fuser unit related service call] in the Service Handbook.
0: No error
1: C41 (Once)
2: C41 (Consecutively occurs)
3: C46 (Reserved)
4: C43
5: C44
6: C45
7: C44
8: C45
9: C44
* Default: 0

10: C47 (Reserved)


11: C47 (Reserved)
12: C48 (Reserved)
13: C49 (Reserved)
14: C47 (Reserved)
15: C48 (Reserved)
16: C49 (Reserved)
17: C47 (Reserved)
18: C48 (Reserved)
19: C49 (Reserved)

Setting Timing
Use this code to resolve the fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45). Resolve the
error, and set "0" (or reset the counter), in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation.

Caution
Remember to resolve the fuser unit related error, and then reset to "0."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 61

08-404/405
Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in
the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing
each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset
the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-404

08-405

Sub code
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

Applied to
Center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
Side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature in the ready state is reset.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).
Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature in the ready state
0: No temperature drop in the ready state
1 to 10: Temperature drop in the ready state (-5 to -50 C)
* Default: 08-404: 1, 08-405: 3
*

Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:


08-404-0 to 3: 1, 08-405-0 to 3: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of
time in the ready state.

Caution

If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

08-407/411
Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state. (The temperature is
detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperature can be individually specified.)
As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in the ready state. If the temperature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-407
08-411

Applied to
Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Side thermistor)
Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state is reset.
0: 140 C
1: 145 C
2: 150 C
3: 155 C
* Default: 6

4: 160 C
5: 165 C
6: 170 C
7: 175 C

8: 180 C
9: 185 C
10: 190 C
11: 195 C

12: 200 C

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the lower temperature, in order to reduce power consumption. Note that inconsistent fusing may occur if the lower temperature is set.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 63

08-409/448
Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller when the equipment switches to energy
saver mode. The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser
unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.
As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in energy saver mode, but an
extended period of time is required to start printing. On the contrary, as the higher temperature is set,
more power consumption is necessary, but a less period of time is required to start printing.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-409
08-448

Applied to
Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Side thermistor)
Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Center thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode is reset.
0: OFF
1: 40 C
2: 50 C
3: 60 C
* Default: 0

4: 70 C
5: 80 C
6: 90 C
7: 100 C

8: 110 C
9: 120 C
10: 130 C
11: 140 C

12: 150 C
13: 160 C

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set the higher temperature, if an extended period of time is required to start printing
by default.
In this case, notify users that more power consumption is necessary.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521
Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by Paper Type)
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during the print operation, to provide
stable and consistent fusing. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor
of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-410
08-413
08-437
08-438
08-450
08-451
08-452
08-453
08-520
08-521

Applied to
Plain paper mode (Center thermistor)
Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)
Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)
Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode (Side thermistor)
Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)
Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)
Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)
Envelope mode (Center thermistor)
Envelope mode (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller is reset by paper type and temperature
control thermistor.
0: 140 C
5: 165 C
10: 190 C
1: 145 C
6: 170 C
11: 195 C
2: 150 C
7: 175 C
12: 200 C
3: 155 C
8: 180 C
13: 205 C
160 C
9: 185 C
14: 210 C
* Default:
08-410/413: 6, 08-437: 9, 08-438: 6, 08-450/451: 6, 08-452: 9, 08-453: 6,
08-520/521: 9

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems
low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 65

08-414
Toner Density Correction Switching
Purpose
The auto-toner sensor is used to detect the toner density, and toner-supply operation is performed to
maintain a constant toner density. When this code is used, the threshold value to supply toner and the
toner density in the developer material vary.
A problem such as insufficient image density is more likely to occur when the developer material
reaches almost the end of its life, thus, this correction gradually increases the correction amount,
depending on the life of the developer material.

Description
The relationship of the set value and the toner density is as follows:
Life: approx.30,000 pages
0: Does not correct
1: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)
3: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)
4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)
6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)
7: -3 bit (approx. -0.6wt%)
* Default: 0

Life: approx.60,000 pages


0: Does not correct
1: Does not correct
2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)
3: +2 bit (approx. +0.5wt%)
4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
5: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)
7: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%)

Life: approx.90,000 pages


0: Does not correct
1: Does not correct
2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)
3: +2 bit (approx. -0.5 wt%)
4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)
5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)
6: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%)
7: -5 bit (approx. - 1.0 wt%)

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the printing density is extremely high or low.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


If the toner density in the developer material is too low, the printing density becomes low. The carrier
adheres to the drum and a scratch may occur on the drum.
If the toner density in the developer material is too high, a problem such as toner scattering may
occur. In addition, toner consumption is increased.
Note that the image is not immediately affected even if the set value is reset. (The toner density in
the developer material will not become higher or lower until a certain amount of print operation is
performed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

08-424/425
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in Ready State
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser
unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every
time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-404/405. When these codes are
used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-424

08-425

Sub code
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

Applied to
Switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
Switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
Switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
Switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
Switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
Switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
Switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
Switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state is
reset.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).
Set value x 1 minute = Switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state
2 to 60: Temperature drop in the ready state (2 to 60 minutes later)
* Default: 5 (15 minutes later)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of
time in the ready state.

Caution

If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 67

08-433/800/801/802/804/896
Temperature Control Lower Limit
Purpose
These codes are used to set the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of
the fuser unit. When these codes are used to reset the lower limit of the drop temperature of the fuser
unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-433
08-800
08-801
08-802
08-804
08-896

Sub code
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Applied to
Plain paper mode at room temperature (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode at room temperature (Side thermistor)
Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)
Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)
Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)
Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)
Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)
Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)
Envelope mode (Center thermistor)
Envelope mode (Side thermistor)
Plain paper mode at low temperature (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode at low temperature (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop is
reset.
0: 130 C
5: 155 C
10: 180 C
1: 135 C
6: 160 C
11: 185 C
2: 140 C
7: 165 C
12: 120 C
3: 145 C
8: 170 C
4: 150 C
9: 175 C
* Default:
08-433-0: 5, 08-433-1: 3, 08-800-0: 7, 08-800-1: 5, 08-801-0: 7, 08-801-1:5
08-802-0/1: 11, 08-804-0/1: 11, 08-896-0: 5, 08-896-1: 3

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quantities.

Caution

If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68

08-439 to 441/523/526
Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper Type)
Purpose
These codes are used to set a period of time required to print the first page (a pre-running time) by
paper type, in order to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.
It is necessary to set a pre-running time and increase the temperature of the fuser roller, to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.
An extended period of time is set by default to give priority to the image quality. However, a shorter
period of time can be set for users who do not desire to set an extended period of time required to print
the first page.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-439
08-440
08-441
08-523
08-526

Applied to
Thick paper 2 mode
Plain paper mode
Thick paper 1 mode
Envelope mode
Transparency film mode

Description
When these codes are used, a pre-running time required to print the first page is reset by paper type.
0: Invalid
4: 4 sec.
8: 8 sec.
12: 14 sec.
1: 1 sec.
5: 5 sec.
9: 9 sec.
13: 16 sec.
2: 2 sec.
6: 6 sec.
10: 10 sec.
14: 18 sec.
3: 3 sec.
7: 7 sec.
11: 12 sec.
15: 20 sec.
* Default: 08-439: 10, 08-440: 0, 08-441: 10, 08-523: 10, 08-526: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to set a smaller value (shorter time) in order to reduce a pre-running time required to
print the first page.
If the smaller value is set (shorter time), inconsistent fusing is more likely to occur.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 69

08-455
Toner Supply Amount Correction
Purpose
When the toner motor is rotated, toner is supplied to the developer. This code is used to correct the
toner motor rotation period when toner is supplied, and the amount of toner supplied at one time.

Description
When this code is used, the toner motor rotation period is reset when toner is supplied.
0: 100%
1: 75%
2: 50%
3: 30%
4: 200%
5: 150%
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

Use this code to reduce the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time,
when toner is supplied.
Use this code to increase the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70

08-462
Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed-Sized Original on RADF
(A/B Format)
*

This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
When an original with A4-R or FOLIO width (both 210 mm in width) is copied in mixed-sized original
mode, either A4-R or FOLIO cannot be identified by their original widths, because they are the same.
Therefore, detect their original lengths, in order to identify A4-R and FOLIO.
The table below shows the combination of the switchback (transporting without scanning in reverse)
setting status and the paper selection mode (APS/AMS) when an original with A4-R/FOLIO width is
copied. As this table explains, since the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function does not
apply in the default setting ("Invalid"), FOLIO is detected as A4-R when the AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) is selected, and paper is fed from the A4-sized drawer. In other combinations, an A4-R/
FOLIO-sized original is detected properly regardless of the selection status of the "transporting without
scanning in reverse" function.
In other words, it is necessary to enable the transporting without scanning in reverse function, in order
to detect a FOLIO-sized original properly, when the AMS is selected.
[Paper size: A4-R/FOLIO]

APS
(Automatic Paper
Selection)

Transporting without scanning


in reverse / size detection
Transporting without scanning in
reverse
Size selection

AMS
(Automatic Magnification Selection)

Transporting without scanning in


reverse
Size selection

Paper selection

"0" (Invalid)

"1" (Valid)

Not performed

Not performed

A4-R --> A4-R


FOLIO --> FOLIO
Not performed

A4-R --> A4-R


FOLIO --> FOLIO
Not performed

A4-R --> A4-R


FOLIO --> A4-R

A4-R --> A4-R


FOLIO --> FOLIO

For the equipment destined for regions, where the LT-format original is applied, whenever LT-R/LG
width is detected, an original is transported without scanning in reverse when the AMS is selected,
regardless of the value set for this code.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to transport A4-R/FOLIO-sized originals without scanning in
reverse is reset, when these mixed originals are placed on the ADF/RADF when the AMS is selected.
0: Invalid (Does not transport in reverse without scanning)
1: Valid (When the AMS is selected, the original length is detected by transporting without scanning
in reverse, and FOLIO is identified properly)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to distinguish A4-R and FOLIO in mixed-sized original mode
when the AMS is selected.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 71

Caution

This code is valid only for the equipment destined for regions, where the A/B-format original is
applied.
If "1" (Valid) is set, and, even when only A4-R-size originals are placed in mixed-sized original mode
when the AMS is selected, these originals are transported in reverse without scanning. As a result,
the original scanning speed is reduced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72

08-463
Light Control Status
Purpose
After performing Forced performing of peak detection (05-310) is performed, this code is used to display the end status and check the status of the exposure light source.

Description
When this code is used, the result on forced performing of peak detection is displayed.
0: Normal end
1: G-LED white level abnormality
2: G-LED peak detection abnormality
3: R-LED adjustment impossible
4: B-LED adjustment impossible
5: YG-LED adjustment impossible
6: White level abnormality
7: Black level abnormality
* Normal operation: 0, in the case of an error: 1 to 7

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the details of the error, if an error occurs when forced performing of peak detection is executed

Caution
When an error occurs (0 to 7 is set), a service call appears. Therefore, replace the CIS unit.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 73

08-476/536/537/539
Temperature Drop Setting during Printing
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit
when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit
is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these
codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-476

08-536

08-537

08-539

Sub code
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

Applied to
Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop
Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop
Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop
Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop
Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

Description
When these codes are used, the drop temperature is reset when the printer function is used to print.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08535).
Set value x -5 C = Drop temperature during the print operation
0: No temperature drop during the print operation
1 to 10: Temperature drop during the print operation (-5 to 50 C)
*

Default value:
08-476-0: 1, 08-476-1: 1, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1
08-536-0: 1, 08-536-1: 2, 08-536-2: 3, 08-536-3: 3
08-537-0: 1, 08-537-1: 2, 08-537-2: 3, 08-537-3: 5
08-539-0: 1, 08-539-1: 2, 08-539-2: 3, 08-539-3: 3

Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:


08-476-0: 0, 08-476-1: 0, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 1
08-536-0: 0, 08-536-1: 0, 08-536-2: 1, 08-536-3: 1
08-537-0: 0, 08-537-1: 0, 08-537-2: 0, 08-537-3: 1
08-539-0: 0, 08-539-1: 0, 08-539-2: 1, 08-539-3: 1

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing
is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

Caution

If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 75

08-480
Default Setting of Paper Source
Purpose
This code is used to specify the paper source option, which is selected by priority, when the copy and
Fax reception functions are used to print. This set value is applied as the paper source, which is
selected by default when the [COPY] or [APS/AMS] button is pressed, and as the paper source, which
is used by priority when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print and the automatic paper
source selection function is used to feed.
* APS (Automatic Paper Selection): It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the
size of an original and selecting a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.

Description
When this code is used, the paper source option by priority is reset.
0: Paper source where A4 or LT-size paper is loaded
1: Drawer
2: PFU drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the paper source option, which is used by priority.
* For instance, if A4-size bond paper and recycled paper are loaded in the separate drawers, use this
code to select a drawer where recycled paper is loaded by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76

08-481
Automatic Paper Source Selection
Purpose
The automatic paper source change function is intended to switch to another paper source, where the
same sized paper is loaded, if the selected paper source has run out of paper during the copy operation. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function is reset
during the copy operation.
0: Enables
1: Disables
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the automatic paper source change function.

Caution
The set value is applied only when the copy function is used.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 77

08-482
Feeding Retry
Purpose
It is hard to feed thick paper or transparency film, compared to plain paper. The equipment automatically retries to feed such hard-to-feed paper, in order to thoroughly feed it after it fails to feed. This code
is used to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.
* When this code is used to enable paper feed retry, up to five retries are performed.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable paper feed retry is reset.
0: Enables
1: Disables
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.

Caution
The number of retries cannot be reset. (Five retries are fixed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78

08-483
Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to switch the polygonal motor from its standby rotation (low
speed rotation) to its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation), when an original is
placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.
* If the polygonal motor switches to its normal rotation when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF
or the platen cover is opened, but the equipment does not start the operation to scan originals within
a certain period of time, the polygonal motor goes back to its standby rotation. The period of time
until it goes back to its standby rotation is set in "Timing of auto-cleaning of polygonal motor pre-running rotation (08-486)."

Description
When this code is used, the switching condition of the polygonal motor from its standby rotation to its
normal rotation is reset.
0: Valid (when the original is placed on the RADF or the platen cover is opened)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (only when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the polygonal motor rotation state between its standby rotation and its normal
rotation, if the original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 79

08-486
Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre-Running Rotation
Purpose
When the equipment does not perform the operation to scan originals for a certain period of time after
the polygonal motor starts pre-running, the polygonal motor switches back from its normal rotation (high
speed rotation during the scan operation) to its standby rotation (low speed rotation). This code is used
to specify the period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation.
* Polygonal motor pre-running is the function to switch the polygonal motor rotation from its standby
rotation to its normal rotation when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is
opened. This code is valid if "0" (default) or "2" is set for "Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
(08-483)."

Description
When this code is used, the period of time until the polygonal motor switches from its normal rotation to
its standby rotation is reset.
0: 15 sec
1: 30 sec
2: 45 sec
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the period of time required to switch the polygonal motor from its normal rotation
to its standby rotation when the equipment does not perform any operation for a certain period of time.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 80

08-502
Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode
Purpose
This code is used to switch the image processing method, with "Photo" selected from among the original mode options, during the copy operation.
Both the error diffusion and dither methods are intended to generate grayscale images using white and
black pixels. But they have different principles.
The dither method determines whether the dot is black or white on a dot-by-dot basis, in accordance
with a particular rule, in response to a gradation of image pixels scanned in Photo mode, and represents grayscale images based on the ratio of black to white dots. On the other hand, the error diffusion
method performs processing, depending on the target and surrounding pixels instead of on a dot-by-dot
basis. It has an advantage of correcting irregularities of the target pixels by checking the surrounding
ones.
The dither method is used by default.

Description
When this code is used, the image processing method is reset in Photo mode during the copy operation.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to switch the image processing method in Photo mode during the copy operation.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 81

08-510
Automatic FAX Transmission
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Fax Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically start scanning and transmit (automatically)
an original placed on the equipment, when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is
pressed during the fax transmission.
In addition, this code is used to start fax transmission when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED
DIAL] button is pressed, and also the [START] button is pressed, in order to prevent improper transmission by users and protect security.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the automatic fax transmission function is reset.
0: Automatic transmission enabled
(Use one-touch keys or press or the [SPEED DIAL] button to transmit a fax.)
1: Automatic transmission disabled
(Use one-touch keys or press the [SPEED DIAL] button, and also press the [START] button to
transmit a fax.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset automatic fax transmission.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 82

08-515/516
Temperature Setting during Warming-up
Purpose
These codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up. A temperature is
detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be
individually specified.
As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced during warming-up. If the temperature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-515
08-516

Applied to
Temperature setting during warming-up (Center thermistor)
Temperature setting during warming-up (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up is reset.
0: 140 C
1: 145 C
2: 150 C
3: 155 C
4: 160 C
* Default: 9

5: 165 C
6: 170 C
7: 175 C
8: 180 C
9: 185 C

10: 190 C
11: 195 C
12: 200 C
13: 205 C
14: 210 C

Setting Timing
In the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems
low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 83

08-525/527/540/541
Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during Printing
Purpose
These codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser
unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser
unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser
unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-476/536/
537/539. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent
fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-525

08-527

08-540

08-541

Sub code
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3

Applied to
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)
Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

Description
When these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop is reset when the
printer function is used to print.
* The set value is valid only if 20 is set for Temperature drop control setting during printing (08535).
Set value x 5 seconds = Switching time to control the temperature drop during the print operation
0: No temperature drop during the print operation
1 to 200: Temperature drop during the print operation (5 to 1,000 seconds later)
* Default:
08-525-0: 20, 08-525-1: 38, 08-525-2: 75, 08-525-3: 75
08-527-0: 20, 08-527-1: 30, 08-527-2: 48, 08-527-3: 75
08-540-0: 20, 08-540-1: 48, 08-540-2: 100, 08-540-3: 100
08-541-0: 20, 08-541-1: 48, 08-541-2: 100, 08-541-3: 100

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing
is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 84

Caution

If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.
If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 85

08-535
Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time)
Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop when the printer function is used to
print. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are
set, and a control pattern option is selected by paper type (plain paper, thick paper). When this code is
used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-535

Sub code
0
1

Applied to
Plain paper mode
Thick paper mode

Thick paper 1 and 2, transparency film and envelope are included in thick paper mode.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) is
reset when the printer function is used to print.
0: No temperature drop control
1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19
20: Temperature and timing selected optionally
* Default: 08-535-0: 2, 08-535-1: 12
*

Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-535-0: 7, 08-535-1: 17

Patterns 1, 3 to 6, 8 to 11, 13 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing

Set 7 for code 07-535-0, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in
large quantities of plain paper.
Set 17 for code 07-535-1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in
large quantities of thick paper.
Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:
Temperature drop setting during printing (08-476/536/537/539)
Temperature drop switching time setting during printing (08-525/527/540/541)

Caution

If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 86

08-538
Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code used to specify the density adjustment value, which is displayed as the default on the control
panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: Auto density adjustment
1: Manual density adjustment: Low density 3 (Light)
2: Manual density adjustment: Low density 2
3: Manual density adjustment: Low density 1
4: Manual density adjustment 0 (Center)
5: Manual density adjustment: High density 1
6: Manual density adjustment: High density 2
7: Manual density adjustment: High density 3 (Dark)
* Default: 0
*

On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in density adjustment mode is set according to the
following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [LIGHT/DARK]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up
and during the copy operation.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 87

08-550
Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel
and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
This code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel
and used by priority during the copy operation.
When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: Text/photo
1: Photo
2: Text
* Default: 0
*

On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in original mode is set according to the following
operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [IMAGE MODE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
The set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up
and during the copy operation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 88

08-603
Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is to specify the copy mode ("Selection of original single-sided/two sided feeding" and
"Selection of simplex/duplex copying"), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used
by priority, when an original is placed on the RADF.

Description
When this code is used, the copy mode, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: Single-sided feeding to simplex copying (one-sided originals --> one-sided copies)
1: Single-sided feeding to duplex copying (one-sided originals --> two-sided copies)
2: Double-sided feeding to duplex copying (two-sided originals --> two-sided copies)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the copy mode, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 89

08-604
APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify which function is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by
priority, "APS (Automatic Paper Selection)" or "AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)" during the
copy operation.
* APS: It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the size of an original and selecting
a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.
* AMS: It is intended to start printing while selecting a drawer where desired paper is loaded and automatically computing a reproduction ratio to fit into the size of paper.

Description
When this code is used, the function, which is used by priority, is reset.
0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the function, which is used by priority.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 90

08-611
Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the default which book-type original is selected as a reference, where oddnumbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side, with characters written horizontally, or where odd
numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, in order to copy a
book-type original in duplexing mode.

Description
When this code is used, the reference book-type original is reset.

0: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side
(Copying starts from a left-hand page to a right-hand page.)
1: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side
(Copying is performed from a right-hand page to a left-hand page.)
* Default: 0
<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side>

Book-type original, where


odd-numbered pages are laid
out on the right-hand side

1st sheet

2nd sheet

3rd sheet

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side>

Book-type original, where


odd-numbered pages are laid
out on the left-hand side

1st sheet

2nd sheet

3rd sheet

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the reference book-type original.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 91

08-615
Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the sizes of main memory and page memory. It is used to check that the
equipment recognizes each memory properly.

Description
When this code is used, the sizes of main memory and page memory are displayed on the screen.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the sizes of main memory and page memory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 92

08-617
Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to accept printing until the department code is registered,
when the printer function is used.
Printing without registering the department code is performed by default. However, the department
code is required once the department management code is registered.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to accept printing without registering the department code is
reset when the printer function is used.
0: Prints forcibly (Accepts printing without entering the department code.)
1: Does not print (Does not accept printing without entering the department code.)
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to enable printing without entering the department code, when
the printer function is used.

Caution
The set value is valid only when the department management function is set to "Valid."

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 93

08-618
Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)
*

This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
Mixed original size mode is intended to place originals in different sizes on the RADF, scan and copy
them at once. The mixed original size mode is available when the [MIXED SIZE] button is pressed on
the control panel. This code is used to specify whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority while it is selected by default.

Description
hen this code is used, whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority is reset.
0: Same size originals (Without [MIXED SIZE] selected)
1: Mixed size originals (With only [MIXED SIZE] selected)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to select the mixed original size mode by default.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 94

08-631
Custom Mode Setting
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the selecting button B is pressed on the main screen during the copy operation, the copy function registered as a custom function is selected. Either of the FINISHING, DUPLEXING, 2IN1/
4IN1, IMAGE SHIFT, DUAL PAGE or ID CARD function is allocated to this custom function.
This code is used to specify the copy function, which is allocated as a custom function.

3
Description
When this code is used, the copy function, which is registered as a custom function, is reset.
0: FINISHING
1: DUPLEXING
2: 2IN1-4IN1
3: IMAGE SHIFT
4: DUAL PAGE
5: ID CARD
* Default: 0
*

On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the custom function is set according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MENU CUSTOMIZE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the custom function.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 95

08-638
Time Differences
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify an appropriate time zone of a region, where the equipment is installed, in
accordance with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).
The set value is applied to DATE in the header information when e-mail is transmitted or when a fax is
transmitted through the Internet.

Description
When this code is used, the time zone of the region, where the equipment is installed, is reset
0: +12.0 H
16: +4.0 H
32: -4.0 H
1: +11.5 H
17: +3.5 H
33: -4.5 H
2: +11.0 H
18: +3.0 H
34: -5.0 H
3: +10.5 H
19: +2.5 H
35: -5.5 H
4: +10.0 H
20: +2.0 H
36: -6.0 H
5: +9.5 H
21: +1.5 H
37: -6.5 H
6: +9.0 H
22: +1.0 H
38: -7.0 H
7: +8.5 H
23: +0.5 H
39: -7.5 H
8: +8.0 H
24: 0.0 H
40: -8.0 H
9: +7.5 H
25: -0.5 H
41: -8.5 H
10: +7.0 H
26: -1.0 H
42: -9.0 H
11: +6.5 H
27: -1.5 H
43: -9.5 H
12: +6.0 H
28: -2.0 H
44: -10.0 H
13: +5.5 H
29: -2.5 H
45: -10.5 H
14: +5.0 H
30: -3.0 H
46: -11.0 H
15: +4.5 H
31: -3.5 H
47: -11.5 H
* Default: JPN (Japan Standard Time): 6
UC (Pacific Standard Time): 40
EUR (UTC or Coordinated Universal Time): 24
*

The time zone is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:
[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Date & Time]

Setting Timing
Use this code, if the time zone is reset because the equipment is relocated to another region.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless the equipment is relocated to another region.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 96

08-641
Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using ADF/RADF) (Copy
Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the
default on the control panel and used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used to copy.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority, is reset when the ADF/RADF is
used.
0: Non-sort
2: Sort
4: Rotate Sort
* Default: 2
*

4 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode option, which is used by priority, when
the ADF/RADF is used.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the ADF/RADF.
Use "Default setting of sorter mode (08-642)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on
the original glass, or when the auto-clear function starts up or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is
pressed after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 97

08-642
Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function)
Purpose
This code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the
default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

Description
When this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation, is reset.
0: Non-sort
1. Group
5: Rotate Sort
6: Magazine Sort
* Default: 1
*

5 and 6 can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the
copy operation.

Caution
The finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the original
glass, or when the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up after the
original is placed on the ADF/RADF Use "Automatic sorting mode setting (when using ADF/RADF) (08641)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 98

08-649
Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function)
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side of the copy
set, with characters written horizontally or on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, when
the magazine sort function is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side or left-hand
side of the copy set is reset when the magazine sort function is used.
0: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the right-hand side
1: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the left-hand side
* Default: 0
Example: When a 12-page original is magazine sorted
<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages


are laid on its right-hand side

<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the left-hand side>

A book, whose odd-numbered pages


are laid on its left-hand side

The page layout when the magazine sort function is used is set according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MAGAZINE SORT]

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 99

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the page layout, when the magazine sort function is
used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 100

08-650
2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy Function)
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the page layout, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and
used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

Description
When this code is used, the page layout, which is used by priority, is reset when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1
function is used.
0: Original with characters written horizontally
1: Original with characters written vertically
* Default: 0
<Example: When the 2 -in-1 function is used to copy>
Original with characters written horizontally
Copy image

Original with characters written vertically

Orientation of the originals

<Example: When the 4 -in-1 function is used to copy>


Original with characters written horizontally

Original with characters written vertically

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the page layout, which is used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is
used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 101

08-655
Reset 05/08 Codes
Purpose
This code is used to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the
PPC FUNC area) to their default values.

Description
When this code is used, the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the
PPC FUNC area) are reset to their default values.

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC
FUNC area) to their default values, after replacing the SRAM board.

Caution

If this code is performed, every set value, which has been adjusted individually at the request of a
user, is reset to its default value. Therefore, carefully perform the setting.
Print the current value for each code in list print mode, and then perform this code. Check the
printed list and enter the set value for each code, in order to restore the set values to the state
before this code is performed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 102

08-660/661
Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Fax Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External
Keyboard are installed.

Purpose
An incoming fax or e-mail image can be forwarded to a client PC by e-mail, transmitted by the Internet
FAX, or saved in the shared folder or e-Filing of the equipment, according to the forwarding option
entered in [Administration] on the TopAccess.
These codes are used to specify whether or not to use the auto-forwarding function.
A destination e-mail address to forward the image does not need to be entered in the address book in
advance. Instead, a user can select whether to enter the e-mail address directly, or use the address
book or the group, in order to set on the TopAccess.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-660
08-661

Applied to
Auto-forwarding setting of received fax
Auto-forwarding setting of received e-mail

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail is reset.
0: Does not forward
1: Automatically forwards
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail.

Caution

If forwarding by e-mail or Internet FAX is selected, incoming images are forcibly printed out.
A forwarding destination e-mail address does not need to be entered in the address book in
advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 103

08-666
BOX Partition Clearing
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
An area specifically for storing TWAIN image data captured when the scanner function is used is allocated to the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.
In the event this partition is corrupted for some reason, or in order to forcibly clear the partition, use this
code to clear and initialize the partition.

Description
When this code is used, the partition of the area storing TWAIN image data is cleared.

Setting Timing

Use this code, in the event the BOX partition is corrupted for some reason.
Use this code, in order to clear the BOX partition for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the BOX partition, all TWAIN image data, which has been stored, is
cleared.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 104

08-669
System All Clearing
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the adjustment values and set values, which are stored in the SRAM on
the Network Printer Kit control board.
Important:
Never perform this code. If this code is performed, the value set for the SRAM returns to its
default at the start of factory assembly (factory pre-adjustment).

Description
Never perform this code.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 105

08-672
Initialization of Department Management Information
Purpose
This code is used to initialize all department management information registered.
*

On the e-STUDIO163, information registered when the access code function is used.

Example of the use of this code:


If the memory area storing department management information is corrupted for some accident,
"Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is not set. In this
case, use this code to initialize the area. Department management information is normally initialized
at factory shipping.

Description
When the [START] button is pressed after the value is set, all department management information is
initialized.

Setting Timing

Use this code, if "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is
not set. (In the event the area storing the department management information is corrupted.)
Use this code, in order to destroy and initialize all department management information.

Caution

If this code is performed, all department management information registered is cleared. Therefore,
carefully perform the setting.
Do not use this code just to reset the counter for all departments. Instead, reset the counter on the
control panel according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [DEPARTMENT CODE] --> key in 1 (department number for master code) --> [COUNT CLEAR]

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 106

08-684/686
Rebuilding Databases
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit and Scanner Upgrade Kit are installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to rebuild the databases in the equipment.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-684
08-686

Applied to
Rebuilding all databases related to the address book
Rebuilding all databases related to the telephone book

Description
When these codes are used, the databases are rebuilt.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to reconfigure or rebuild the databases.

Caution
If these codes are performed, all information in the address book or telephone book is initialized (or
cleared). Therefore, carefully perform the setting.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 107

08-685
Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
The equipment can print two sheets of paper by alternately circulating them internally, while continuously feeding the next sheet without waiting for the one where a copy of one side is made to exit in
duplexing mode. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation is reset.
0: Disables
1: Enables
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation in duplexing mode.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 108

08-690
CF Formatting
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to format the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.

Description
When this code is used, the area storing TWAIN image data, address book data and templates is formatted and the CF returns to its initial state.

Setting Timing
None.

Caution
Never perform this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 109

08-691
Template Function Setting
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
In scanner mode, when the one-touch buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated for templates and
pressed, the templates set on the TopAccess are available. This code is used to specify whether or not
to use this template function.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the template function is reset.
0: Uses
1: Does not use
* Default: 1
*

On the e-STUDIO165/205, the template function is set according to the following operation:
[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [INITIAL SETUP] --> [TEMPLATE]

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the template function.

Caution
If the template function is used, no address can be entered in the telephone book when the one-touch
buttons from 66 to 75 are allocated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 110

08-693
Initialization of NIC Information
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to reset the NIC (Network Interface Card included in the Network Printer Kit control
board) to the initial state.

Description

When this code is used, the NIC is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code, in the event a NIC malfunction occurs for some reason.

Caution
If this code is performed, all NIC information is initialized. Therefore, it is necessary to reconfigure it.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 111

08-695
Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports Embedded IC chip)
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge is properly installed, and
whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge properly installed is a recommended one.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to check the remaining amount of toner is
reset.
0: Does not check
1: Checks
* Default: CND: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code, in order to use a toner cartridge other than the recommended
ones.

Caution
If the set value is reset, the set value for Toner near empty threshold value (08-971) is also reset as
follows automatically:
If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned OFF.
If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 112

08-698
Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit
Purpose
This code is used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit
paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled
up.
If the number of paper continuously exits exceeds the limit number, the equipment suspends operations, lights up or flashes the lamp on the control panel, and displays a message.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset.
0: Does not limit the number of paper exits
1: Limits the number of paper exits
* Default: 1
*

The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 113

08-699
Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit
Purpose
The equipment has the function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the
paper piled up.
This code is used to set the number of paper continuously exits per job.

Description
When this code is used, the number of paper continuously exits per job, is specified.
Set value = Limited number of paper
*
*
*

Acceptable values: 1 to 999


Default: 250 (sheets of paper)

Whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is specified for Limit function for
the number of paper exit (08-698).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the limit number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 114

08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/


796
TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The "TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS)" is a system, which enables remote
administration of device information of the equipment via the Internet. These codes are required to
enable communications between the "Device Management Portal (DMP)", which is installed over the
Internet, and the equipment.
The equipment transmits information of each counter type, service call error information, usage condition of supplies, etc. to the DMP. A service administrator can remote control such information by
accessing to the DMP.

Description
1) RDMS setting
Code
08-702

Description
RDMS Function Setting
If "invalid" is set, device information is not transmitted to the DMP (RDMS does not function).

Set value
In order to enable this setting, "valid
(DMP)" is set at the equipment.
0: Valid (DMP), 1: Valid (DMC),
2: Invalid
* Default: 2

2) Proxy setting (A network environment with the proxy)


Code
08-726
08-727

08-728
08-729
08-730

Description
HTTP Proxy Setting
This code is used to specify whether or not to
enable the proxy setting.
HTTP Proxy IP Address Setting
This code is used to enter the IP address
obtained from the user.
Be sure to enter in "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" format.
e.g. 192.168.010.001
HTTP Proxy Port Number Setting
This code is used to enter the port number
obtained from the user.
HTTP Proxy ID Setting
This code is used to enter the ID obtained from
the user.
HTTP Proxy Password Setting
This code is used to enter the password obtained
from the user.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Set value
0: Valid, 1: invalid
* Default: 1
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000

Acceptable values: 0 to 65535


* Default: 0
Maximum 30 letters
Maximum 30 letters

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 115

3) RDMS Initial Registration


Perform the settings for initial registration in order to communicate with the DMP.
Code
08-718

08-720
08-707

08-772
08-773
08-719

Description
Remote-controlled Service Initial Registration
This code is used to complete all settings regarding the RDMS and set "start" during initial registration.
Check the status of remote-controlled service initial registration.
Remote-controlled Service initially-registered
URL
Only the URL is checked because the URL
shown on the right has been entered as the
default.
Note:
Note:
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.
Dealer's Name
DMP Login Name
This code is used to enter the login name
obtained from the DMP Management.
Tentative Password
This code is used to enter the tentative password
obtained from the DMP Management.

Set value
0: OFF, 1: Start, 2: Only certification is
scanned
* Default: 0
0: Not registered, 1: Registered
* Default: 0
Maximum 256 letters
* Default:
https//device.mfp.support.com:
443/device/community.ashx

Maximum 100 letters


Maximum 20 letters
Maximum 10 letters

4) Periodical communication setting


Set the access timing, etc. to the DMP.
Code
08-703

08-710

08-711
08-715
08-716
08-717

08-780
08-781
08-782

Description
Remote-controlled Service HTTP Server URL
Setting
This code is used to enter the URL of the DMP
obtained from the DMP Management.
Recovery Mode Time Setting of Emergency Short
Interval Communication Mode
Recovery time interval from the emergency to
normal mode
Interval Setting of Emergency Short Interval
Communication Mode
Polling Timing Setting
This code is used to set the polling timing.
Remote-controlled Service Self-diagnosis Code
Writing
Response Waiting Time (Timeout) Setting
This code is used to set the disconnection time of
communication when there is no response from
the DMP.
Specified Polling Day Selection Day-1 of Month
This code is used to set the month and day of the
polling day.
Specified Polling Day Selection Day-2 of Month
This code is used to set the month and day of the
polling day.
Specified Polling Day Selection Day-3 of Month
This code is used to set the month and day of the
polling day.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

Set value
Maximum 256 letters

Acceptable values: 1 to 48 (hours)


* Default: 24 (hours)
Acceptable values: 30 to 360 (minutes)
* Default: 60 (minutes)
00:00 to 23:59
e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.
* Default: 1230
0: Prohibited, 1: Accepted
* Default: 0
Acceptable values: 1 to 30 (minutes)
* Default: 3 (minutes)
0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
month
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
month
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
month
* Default: 0

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 116

Code
08-783
08-784

Description
Specified Polling Day Selection Day-4 of Month
This code is used to set the month and day of the
polling day.
Specified Polling Day of the Week (Sunday)

08-785

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday)

08-786

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Tuesday)

08-787

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Wednesday)

08-788

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Thursday)

08-789

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Friday)

08-790

Specified Polling Day of the Week (Saturday)

08-796

Specified End of Month Polling


This code is used to specify whether or not to poll
at the end of the month.

Set value
0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a
month
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
Specified Polling Day of the Week
(Monday)
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* 0: OFF, 1: ON
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
* Default: 0

5) Service center call function setting


Set the notification method and destination when a service center call error occurs.
Code
08-721

Description
Service Center Call

08-723

Service Center Call HTTP Server URL Setting


When a service call error occurs, this code is
used to transmit the error content to the specified
HTTP server.

Set value
0: Valid, 1: Notifies all, 2: Notifies other
than a jam
* Default: 2
Maximum 256 letters
* Never change the initial setting
without instructions.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to remote control information of the equipment using the RDMS.

Caution

Obtain the following information and then use these codes:


Information to be obtained from the DMP Management.
- URL of the DMP
- HTTP port number of the DMP
- URL for DMP initial registration
- HTTP port number for DMP initial registration
- Login name of the DMP
- Login name of the DMP
- Tentative password for DMP
Information to be obtained from the user.
- IP address of the HTTP proxy server
- Port number of the HTTP proxy server
- D of the HTTP proxy server
- Password for the HTTP proxy server

Check the date and time, make corrections if necessary, and then use these codes.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 117

08-712/713/714
250 sheets limitation for output pages
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
When the printer function or Fax reception function is used to print, these codes are used to limit the
number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit
tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-712
08-713
08-714

Applied to
Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the GDI printer
function is used
Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the network
printer function is used
Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the Fax function
is used

Description
When these codes are used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is
reset.
0: Does not limit the number of paper exits
1: Limits the number of paper exits
* Default: 0
*

The limit number of paper exits is set for Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use these codes to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 118

08-767 to 771/775 to 778


Service Notification Function Setting
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This equipment installs the "Service Notification Function," which notifies a service engineer of the
equipment status (each counter information, service call error information, and PM counter information)
by e-mail.
These codes are necessary in order to use the service notification function.

Description
Code
08-767
08-768

08-769

08-770

08-771
08-775

08-776
08-777
08-778

Description
Service Notification Setting
* If "Invalid" is set, the service notification function becomes invalid.
Destination E-mail Address 1
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address.
* Set values for codes 08-777/778 in the same
manner to designate several addresses.
Total Counter Information transmission setting
This code is used to specify whether or not to
perform the total counter information transmission.
Total Counter Transmission Interval Setting
This code is used to specify whether or not to
perform the total counter transmission on which
day of each month.
PM Counter Information Transmission Setting
This code is used to specify whether or not to
perform the PM counter information transmission.
Error Contents of Equipment Transmission Setting
This code is used to specify whether or not to
transmit error contents of the equipment.
Setting Total Counter Transmission Time
This code is used to set the transmission time.
Destination E-mail Address 2
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address
Destination E-mail Address 3
This code is used to enter a destination e-mail
address.

Set value
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
* Default: 0
Maximum 192 letters

0: Invalid, 1: Valid
* Default: 0
1 to 31 (1st to 31st day)
* Default: 1 (1st day)
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
* Default: 0
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
* Default: 0
00:00 to 23:59
e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to automatically notify a service engineer of the equipment status using the service
notification function.

Caution
The network setting is necessary in order to send e-mail in advance.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 119

08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867


Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
*

Code 08-818 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value, which is adjusted for "Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)" in toner save mode
and original mode.
A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-805
08-806
08-814
08-807
08-808
08-809
08-826
08-864
08-819
08-865
08-866
08-867
08-818

Applied to
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(General)
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Toner save mode)
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(GDI)
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(General)
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Text)
Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode
(Photo)
Main charger bias correction (Toner save mode)
Main charger bias correction (General)
Main charger bias correction (GDI)
Main charger bias correction (General)
Main charger bias correction (Text)
Main charger bias correction (Photo)
Main charger bias correction (Fax)

Function mode
Printer (PCL/PS)

Printer (GDI)
Copy

Printer (PCL/PS)
Printer (GDI)
Copy

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output
from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface
becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is
formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density.
On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the
main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower (or more neutral). Then the amount
of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the
higher printing density.
The variation in the amount of the main charger grid bias voltage per bit is approximately 3V.
0 to 255 (bit value)
* Default: 08-805 to 809/814: 98, 08-818/819/826/864 to 867: 128

Setting Timing

Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value in each mode.
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output
value specifically in transparency film mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 120

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Image problems such as a carrier pulling, foggy image may occur, unless "Developer bias correction
(08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.
For example, if the main charger grid bias is corrected to +10 bit (.-30V), the developer bias output
needs to be set to +6 bit (.-30V) accordingly.
Descriptions for codes 08-826/864 to 867 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes
and then use codes 08-805 to 809 specifically in transparency film mode.
Descriptions for codes 08-814/819 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-805/806/826/864 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-865 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 121

08-830/868/869
Transfer DC Correction
Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the transfer DC output value,
which is adjusted in "Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)" at the leading edge, center and
trailing edge of paper.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-830
08-868
08-869

Applied to
Transfer DC output correction (C), center of paper
Transfer DC output correction (H), leading edge of paper
Transfer DC output correction (L), trailing edge of paper

Description
When these codes are used, the transfer DC output is corrected.
As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main
charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the
other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner
transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.
0 to 255 (bit value)
* Default value: 128

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the condition of the transferred image at the leading edge, center and trailing edge
is poor due to the paper used or the operating environment.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 122

08-831/870/871
Separation DC Output Correction
Purpose
These codes are used to correct the separation status, while correcting the separation transformer DC
output adjusted in "Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)" at the leading edge, center and
trailing edge of paper.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-831
08-870
08-871

Applied to
Separation DC output correction (C), center of paper
Separation DC output correction (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of
paper
Separation DC output correction (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading edge
of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

Description
As the set value is increased, the DC voltage becomes higher, and the positive electric charge on paper
becomes lower. Then separation becomes easy. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the
DC voltage becomes lower, and the ratio of positive electric charge on paper to become lower is
decreased. Then separation becomes difficult.
*
*

Default value: 128


Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: difficult to separate, 255: easy to separate)

Setting Timing
Use these codes, if the separation condition is poor, depending on paper being used and environment.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Note that when the separation DC output is increased too much, poor transfer (avatar) may occur.
Decrease the separation DC output, if poor transfer (avatar) occurs. Note that when the separation
DC output is decreased too much, paper separation efficiency may be decreased.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 123

08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863


Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
*

Code 08-857 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value,
which is adjusted in "Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)" in toner save mode and original
mode.
A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-833
08-834
08-840
08-835
08-836
08-837
08-859
08-860
08-858
08-861
08-862
08-863
08-857

Applied to
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General)
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save
mode)
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI)
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General)
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Text)
Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo)
Developer bias correction (Toner save mode)
Developer bias correction (General)
Developer bias correction (GDI)
Developer bias correction (General)
Developer bias correction (Text)
Developer bias correction (Photo)
Developer bias correction (Fax)

Function mode
Printer (PCL/PS)

Printer (GDI)
Copy

Printer (PCL/PS)
Printer (GDI)
Copy

Fax

Description
When these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the
high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (magnetic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher
printing density. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage
becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is
decreased. This results in the lower printing density.
The variation in the amount of the developer bias voltage per bit is approximately 5V.
0 to 255 (bit value)
* Default: 08-833 to 837/840: 107, 08-857 to 863: 128

Setting Timing

Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value in
each mode.
Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value
specifically in transparency film mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 124

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Image problems such as a carrier adhesion, foggy image may occur, unless "Main charger grid bias
correction (08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.
For example, if the developer bias output is set to +6 bit (.-30V), the main charger grid bias needs to
be corrected to +10 bit (.-30V) accordingly.
Descriptions for codes 08-859 to 863 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and
then use codes 08-833 to 837 specifically in transparency film mode.
Descriptions for codes 08-840/858 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-833/834/859/860 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-861 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 125

08-838
Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching
Purpose
The toner recycling mechanism is installed in the equipment. If the process unit (cleaner and developer
unit) becomes hot and toner remains in the transportation path for recycled toner, toner also becomes
hot and its performance may degrade. If the drum thermistor detects the hot process unit (40C or
more), another 20 seconds are added to the period for toner transportation, in order to completely
transport toner remaining in the transportation path into the developer unit, at the end of printing. Then,
the cooling fan rotates for 120 seconds, in order to cool down the transportation path for recycled toner.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to use the recycled toner saving control is reset.
0: Enable (Control is enabled.)
1: Disable (Control is disabled.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to "Disable" the toner saving control, because it is frequently operated.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


When "Disable" is set, the internal equipment becomes hot due to continuous printing, and toner
degrades in the transportation path for recycled toner by a high temperature. Problems such as a
locked transportation area for recycled toner or foggy image may occur.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 126

08-839
Correction by Temperature/Humidity
Purpose
The temperature and humidity sensor detects the temperature and humidity of outside air captured in
the equipment, in order to prevent print quality from being affected by the temperature and humidity in a
location where the equipment is installed. The auto-toner sensor output, transfer DC output, main
charger bias, separation DC output, developer bias and laser output are corrected based on the result.
This code is used to specify whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on these outputs.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on the auto-toner sensor
output, each bias output and laser output is reset.
0: All valid (Collects all)
1: All invalid (Does not collect)
2: Corrects only the auto-toner sensor output
3: All valid except transfer and separation
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset temperature and humidity correction items.

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 127

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884
Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)
*

Code 08-884 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
These codes are used to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power adjusted in "Laser power
adjustment (05-286)" in toner save mode or original mode.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-872
08-875
08-883
08-873
08-876
08-877
08-884

Applied to
Laser output correction (General)
Laser output correction (Toner save mode)
Laser output correction (GDI)
Laser output correction (General)
Laser output correction (Text)
Laser output correction (Photo)
Laser output correction (Fax)

Function mode
Printer (PCL/PS)
Printer (GDI)
Copy

Fax

Description
As the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On
the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density
becomes lower.
0 to 255 (bit value)
* Default: 08-872/873/875/876/877: 128, 08-883: 136, 08-884: 110

Setting Timing
Use these codes to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power in toner save mode and original
mode.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Descriptions for code 08-883 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.
Descriptions for codes 08-872/875 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Network Printer Kit) is used.
Descriptions for code 08-873 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 128

08-886
Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time)
Purpose
This code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop in the ready state. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set. When this code is
used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

Description
When this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) in
the ready state is reset
0: No temperature drop control
1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 19
20: Temperature and timing selected optionally
* Default: 4
*

Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 1

Patterns 2, 3, 5 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing

Set 1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in
the ready state.
Set 20 in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:
Temperature drop setting in ready state (08-404/405)
Temperature drop switching time setting in ready state (08-424/425)

Caution

If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully
perform the setting.
Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set
value.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 129

08-900/906
ROM Version Display
*

Code 08-906 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The electric circuits in the equipment are composed of multiple PC boards, whose roles and operations
are different. The CPU and FROM (flash ROM) are mounted on the MAIN board, which plays a critical
role. The CPU performs processing, based on the programs written in the ROM. This allows each unit
or section in the equipment to be operated. The CPU drive programs on the PFC board are written in
the FROM embedded in the CPU, which is mounted on the PFC board, in the same manner. These
codes are used to display and check the versions of the programs, which are stored in the flash ROM
on each board.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-900
08-906

Applied to
System firmware ROM version display (FROM on the MAIN board)
PFC ROM version display (FROM embedded in the CPU on the PFC board)

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each flash ROM are shown as follows:
(X: Major version, Y: Minor version)
08-900:
System ROM version (system firmware version):
e-STUDIO163/203:
XX-YYY
e-STUDIO165/205:
JPN:
T208SY0UXXX
CND:
T208SY0CXXX
Others: T208SY0WXXX
08-906:
PFC ROM version: XXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the ROM on each board, after updating the firmware, such as the system firmware and engine firmware.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 130

08-905
Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at Duplex Copying
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether to simplex copy the one-sided last page or duplex copy the onesided last page where a blank page is added to the back of the one-sided last page to handle as an
even page original, when an odd page original is duplex copied.

Description
When this code is used, the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying is specified.
0: Simplex copying
1: Duplex copying (Blank page is added)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex
copying.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 131

08-921/1951
FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display
*
*

Code 08-1951 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


Code 08-1951 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the MAIN board, contains equipment program data. The
FROM, which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains network-related control
(print) programs. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these programs, which are
stored in each memory.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-921
08-1951

Applied to
Equipment program data version display
CPU version display on the Network Printer Kit control board

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each memory are shown as follows:
08-921:
Equipment program data version: VTHXX.YYY Z
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version
Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W)
08-1951:
CPU version on the Network Printer Kit control board: X.YY/12
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the system firmware.

Caution
The following program data are stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to
check the versions in 08 SETTING code.
System ROM (system firmware): 08-900
Equipment program data: 08-921
Function table data: 08-922
Language data: 08-923

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 132

08-922/923
Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the SYS board, contains function table data and language data. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-922
08-923

Applied to
Function table data version display
Language data version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of function table data and language data stored in the flash
ROM are shown as follows:
(X: Version, Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W))
08-922:
Function table data version: T282SY1ZXXX
08-923:
Language data version: T282SY2ZXXX

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board,
after updating the system firmware.

Caution
The following program data is stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to
check the versions in 08 SETTING code.
System ROM (system firmware): 08-900
Equipment program data: 08-921
Function table data: 08-922
Language data: 08-923

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 133

08-945
Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The port number 9100 is used to perform Raw TCP printing, when the equipment is used as a network
printer. (The port number can be selected for "Raw port number setting (08-1074).") This code is used
to specify whether to enable bi-directional communication or one-way (default) communication from a
client PC to the equipment, during data transmission through the port number 9100.
* Raw TCP/IP printing is available on a client's PC where Windows 2000 or Windows XP (IP-P2P
V3.12 tools, provided by CD for Windows 95/98/Me) is installed. The equipment does not correspond to the bi-directional communication. However, this printing is available, if the network administrator permits the Raw TCP connection and validates the Raw TCP printing function at the print
service setting. In this case, this code is used to reset the data transmission conditions (bi-directional communication ON/OFF).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable bi-directional communication through the port number
9100 is reset.
1: ON
2: OFF
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to perform bi-directional communication through the port number 9100, when performing
Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 134

08-947
Initialization when Software is Upgraded
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to perform the necessary initialization of the internal process when software is
upgraded for the addition of functions and quality improvement.

Description
When the code is used, the initialization is performed for additional new functions, when software is
upgraded.

Setting Timing
Use this code when the software of the equipment is upgraded.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 135

08-949
Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting
Purpose
If poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used, drum cleaning may be
improper carried out due to the paper dust. The equipment pauses printing and rotate the drum in the
opposite direction to print large quantities, in order to prevent drum cleaning from being improperly performed. This code is used to specify conditions to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

Description
When this code is used, the copy count is reset to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.
Set value x 10 pages = Copy count to rotate the drum in the opposite direction
0: Does not rotate the drum in the opposite direction
1 to 1000:
Pauses printing and rotates the drum in the opposite direction after printing the specified number
of pages (100 to 10,000 pages)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if drum cleaning is improperly carried out due to paper dust.
(When cleaning is improperly carried out, clean the cleaning blade and use this code prior to resuming
printing.)

Caution
Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 136

08-970
Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment has been in
an idle state for a certain period of time, and switches to energy saver mode.

Description
When this code used, whether or not to generate the beep tone is reset, when the equipment switches
to energy saver mode.
0: OFF (No beep tone is generated.)
1: ON (The beep tone is generated.)
* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to switch whether or not to generate the beep tone when the
equipment switches to energy saver mode.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 137

08-971
Toner Near Empty Threshold Value
Purpose
This code is used to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition when the function to detect
the remaining amount of toner is used.
The function to detect the remaining amount of toner is available only when the recommended toner
cartridge is installed.

Description
When this code used, the timing to detect the toner near end condition is reset.
0: Near empty threshold value (Longer)
* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes longer.
1: Near empty threshold value (Center)
2: Near empty threshold value (Shorter)
* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes shorter.
3: No detection of the toner near end condition
*

Default: CND: 3, Others: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


If 2 is set, the interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes
shorter. Therefore, No Toner is more likely to be detected before the toner near end condition is
detected, due to the variation or difference in the toner remaining in the toner cartridge.
If the set value for Toner remaining check function (supports embedded IC chip) (08-695) is reset,
the set value for code 08-971 is also reset as follows automatically:
- If 0 is set for code 08-695, 3 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned OFF.
- If 1 is set for code 08-695, 1 is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining
amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 138

08-973
PCL Line Feed Code Setting
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the
printer control language (PCL), when the Network Printer Kit is used to print.

Description
When this code is used, the feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control
language (PCL) is reset.
0: Auto (Automatically determined)
1: CR = CR, LF = LF
2: CR = CR + LF, LF = LF
3: CR = CR, LF = CR + LF
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line
feed code of the printer control language (PCL).

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 139

08-995
Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose
This code is used to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, a serial number is entered up to 20 digits.
*

Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to enter the serial number of the equipment.

Caution
Only the numeric values from 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters from A to Z are acceptable.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 140

08-1002
Selection of NIC Board Status Information
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to print out the NIC status, when the hardware is reset.
* At power-on, or when any setting where the initialization of the NIC is required on the control panel
or TopAccess, the hardware is reset.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to print out the NIC status is specified, when the hardware is
reset.
1: Does not print, when the hardware is reset.
2: Prints, when the hardware is reset.
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to print out the NIC status.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 141

08-1003
Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the Ethernet speed and communication speed, depending on the network
environment where the equipment is connected.

Description
When this code is used, the Ethernet speed and communication speed are specified.
1: Auto
2: 10 Mbps Half Duplex
3: 10 Mbps Full Duplex
4: 100 Mbps Half Duplex
5: 100 Mbps Full Duplex
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Change the set value from the default, if a network connection cannot be established properly by
default (Auto), due to compatibility with a hub.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 142

08-1006 to 1010/1112
TCP/IP
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via TCP/IP.
TCP/IP needs to be set, in order to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Description
Code
08-1006

Description
Method of IP Addressing

08-1007
08-1008

Domain Name
IP Address
If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 081006, this code is used to enter the IP
address of the equipment.
Note:
Note:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code
08-1006, never reset the set value.
(The set value will be bypassed.)
Subnet Mask
If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 081006, this code is used to enter a subnet
mask, when necessary.
Note:
Note:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code
08-1006, never change the set value.
(The set value will be bypassed.)

08-1009

08-1010

08-1112

Gateway
If the equipment is used via the router over
the network, this code is used to enter a
default gateway address.
Note:
Note:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code
08-1006, never change the set
value.(The set value will be
bypassed.)
Host Name

Set value
1: Manual (fixed), 2: Auto (DHCP)
3: Does not handle Auto IP at auto (DHCP)
* Default: 2
Maximum 96 letters
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter a subnet mask in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 255.255.255.000
Note:
Note:
Never set "000.000.000.000" or
"255.255.255.255" for a subnet
mask. Otherwise, the SMB function
will not be available, even if the SMB
protocol is enabled.
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter a gateway address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010

Maximum 63 letters
* Default: MFP_serial

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing,
e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.
2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 143

08-1011/1012
IPX/SPX
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via IPX/SPX.
IPX/SPX needs to be set, in order to use the Novell printing functions via IPX/SPX, when the Net-Ware
server is used.

Description
Code
08-1011
08-1012

Description
Availability of IPX
This code is used to specify whether or not to
enable IPX/SPX.
Network Frame Type
This code is used to select a network frame
type, when necessary.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
1: Auto, 2: IEEE 802.3,
3: Ethernet II, 4: IEEE 802.3 SNMP,
5: IEEE 802.2
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the Novell printing function via IPX/SPX, when the NetWare server is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 144

08-1013
Availability of NCP Burst
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the burst transfer of print data in Novell NCP printing.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the burst transfer is specified.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to improve print performance in the version of Novell NetWare 4.12 or later.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 145

08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105
AppleTalk
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to enable communications via AppleTalk.
AppleTalk needs to be set, in order to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

Description
Code
08-1014
08-1015

08-1103

08-1104
08-1105

Description
Availability of AppleTalk
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable AppleTalk.
Zone Setting of AppleTalk
This code is used to enter a name of a zone
where the equipment is connected to, when
necessary.
If no zone name is entered, the equipment is
connected to the default zone "*."
Validity/Invalidity of Rendezvous
When Rendezvous is selected in the OSX
with Web Browser "Safari," the equipment
over the network is automatically detected.
(The Service Name explained in code "081105" is used for automatic detection.)
Access to the TopAccess is available by only
clicking the equipment name, which is
detected.
If a number of equipments are connected
over the network, a number such as "2", "3",
is added to the end of the service name of
the 2nd equipment or later on Safari.
Link-Local Host Name
This code is used to enter the equipment
name.
Service Name
This code is used to enter the service name
of the equipment for the Rendezvous function.
This service name is used when the Rendezvous function is used to search for the
equipment over the network.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
Maximum 32 letters
* "* (wild card)" as a default value

1: Valid, 2: Invalid
Default: 1

Maximum 127 letters


Default: MFP_serial
Maximum 63 letters
Default:
* e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO163
e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO203
e-STUDIO165: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO165
e-STUDIO205: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO205

Setting Timing
Use these codes to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 146

08-1017 to 1019
DNS
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to set a FQDN name to each server address, when DNS is used.
The availability of DNS and the DNS server address need to be set, in order to include the FQDN in the
address of the SMTP server (08-1038) or POP3 server (08-1047).

Description
Code
08-1017
08-1018

08-1019

Description
Availability of DNS
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable DNS.
IP Address to the primary DNS Server

IP Address to the secondary DNS Server

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.100
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010

Setting Timing
These codes are used to set a host name for the equipment, when DNS is used.

Caution

To search for the above host name on the DNS server where DNS is set, the target host name
needs to be registered on this DNS server.
For further information regarding the settings on the DNS server, contact a network administrator,
who is responsible for establishing the network environment with the equipment.
A host name is the name expressed after @ and before the following dot "." in the FQDN (e-mail
address) (e.g. user@host.domain).

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 147

08-1020
DDNS Desired Level
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to enable the dynamic DNS service, if the dynamic DNS is supported on the DNS
server.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS service is specified.
1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi Secure DDNS
* Default: 3

Setting Timing
Use this code to reset the dynamic DNS service.

Caution
DDNS of the equipment supports only two options, "Via DHCP" and "Insecure DDNS." "Via DHCP" is a
function, which uses the DNS registration function (registration function of record A) on the DHCP
server. "Insecure DDNS" is intended to register DNS directly on the DNS server. Even if other options
("Secure DDNS" and "Multi Secure DDNS") are selected, they will not function.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 148

08-1024/1025
Name of WINS Server
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to specify an IP address of the WINS server, when the WINS server is used to
share a file or printer between different subnets.

Description
Code
08-1024

08-1025

3
Description
Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Primary)
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the primary WINS server, if the WINS server
it is used to provide a NetBios name and
workgroup name of the equipment.
Note:
Note:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code
08-1006, never reset the set value.
000.000.000.000" is set by default. If
Auto (DHCP) is selected, the
address is acquired on the DHCP
server. However, if some sort of IP
Address is registered, the address
cannot be acquired on the DHCP
server even if Auto (DHCP) is
selected.
Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Secondary)
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the secondary WINS server, if the WINS
server is used to provide a NetBios name
and workgroup name of the equipment.
Note:
Note:
If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code
08-1006, never reset the set value.
000.000.000.000" is set by default. If
Auto (DHCP) is selected, the
address is acquired on the DHCP
server. However, if some sort of IP
Address is registered, the address
cannot be acquired on the DHCP
server even if Auto (DHCP) is
selected.

Set value
Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010
Note:
Note:
Never enter an IP address starting
with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244"
(e.g. 244.10.10.10).
Numeric values are acceptable, but
not characters.

Enter an IP address in the following format:


"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010
Note:
Note:
Never enter an IP address starting
with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244"
(e.g. 244.10.10.10).
Numeric values are acceptable, but
not characters.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to share a file or printer between different subnets when the WINS server is used to
share a file or printer between different subnets.

Caution
Refer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in Description.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 149

08-1026 to 1029
NetWare
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to establish the Novell printing environment.

Description
Code
08-1026

08-1027

08-1028

08-1029

Description
Availability of Bindery
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable Novell printing in NetWare Bindery
mode.
Availability of NDS
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable Novell printing in NetWare NDS
mode.
* If "1" (available) is set, perform the settings for codes 08-1028 and 1029.
Directory Service Context
This code is used to enter the NDS context
of the NetWare print server for the equipment.
Directory Service Tree
This code is used to enter the NDS tree.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

Maximum 127 letters

Maximum 47 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to establish the Novell printing environment.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 150

08-1030 to 1032
HTTP
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility,
or to enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Description
Code
08-1030
08-1031

08-1032

3
Description
Availability of HTTP Server
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable the HTTP server.
Port Number to NIC HTTP Server
This code is used to enter a port number for
HTTP access.
Normally, "80" is set.
Note:
Note:
Use the default value, unless otherwise required.
Port Number to System HTTP Server
This code is used to enter a port number for
accessing the Web-based utilities including
the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.
Normally, "8080" is set.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
* Default: 80

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535


* Default: 8080

Setting Timing
Use these codes to:
Use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.
Enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Caution
If the port number to NIC HTTP server is changed from the default "80," the TopAccess is not available
on the Web browser. Therefore, use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 151

08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111


SMTP
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

Description
Code
08-1037

08-1038
08-1039

08-1040

08-1041

08-1042
08-1043
08-1044

08-1045

08-1100
08-1101

Description
Availability of SMTP Client
"1" (available) is set to transmit a fax through
the Internet from the equipment via the
SMTP server.
FQDN or IP Address to SMTP Server
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the SMTP server. Or enter the FQDN.
TCP Port Number of SMTP Client
This code is used to enter a port number for
accessing the SMTP server.
Normally, "25" is set.
Availability of SMTP Server
This code is used to specify whether or not
to use the equipment as the SMTP server.
"1" (available) is set to use the offramp gateway function.
TCP Port Number of SMTP Server
This code is used to enter a port number to
receive a fax or e-mail through the Internet
via the SMTP server.
Normally, "25" is set.
E-mail Box Name to SMTP Server
This code is used to enter an e-mail address
assigned to the equipment.
Availability of Offramp
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable the offramp gateway transmission.
Offramp Security
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable the offramp gateway security.
If "1" (available) is set, the offramp gateway
transmission is applied only to the fax number registered in the address book of the
equipment.
Printing at Offramp
This code is used to specify whether or not
to print a document forwarded, when the
offramp gateway function is used.
SMTP authentication system
Login Name for SMTP Authentication
This code is used to enter the login name for
the equipment to access to the STMP
server.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

Description
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
Maximum 128 letters
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
* Default: 25
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535


* Default: 25

Maximum 192 letters


1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 2
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

1: Prints, 2. Does not print


* Default: 1
1: Plain, 2: Login, 3: Digest MD5,
4: Disable
* Default: 4
Maximum 64 letters

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 152

Code
08-1102

08-1111

Description
Login Password for SMTP Authentication
This code is used to enter the password for
the equipment to access to the SMTP
server.
Validity/Invalidity of POP before SMTP
This code is used to select whether or not to
transmit e-mail after the authentication by
POP is performed.
If "valid" is selected, unauthorized e-mail
transmission and disrupt can be prevented.

Description
Maximum 64 letters

1: Available, 2: Not available


* Default: 4

Setting Timing
Use these codes to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 153

08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098
POP3
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to receive a fax through the Internet or an e-mail print job, when POP3 is used.

Description
Code
08-1046

08-1047

08-1048
08-1049

08-1050

08-1051

08-1052

08-1097

08-1098

Description
Availability of POP3 Clients
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable the POP3 client function.
"1" (available) is set to retrieve a fax through
the Internet on the POP3 server.
FQDN or IP Address to POP3 Server
This code is used to enter an IP address of
the POP3 server.
Or enter the FQDN.
Types of POP3 server
This code is used to select a type of login to
the POP3 server.
Login Name to POP3 Server
This code is used to enter a login name,
allowing the equipment to access the POP3
server.
Login Password to POP3 Server
This code is used to enter a password,
allowing the equipment to access the POP3
server.
E-mail Reception Interval
This code is used to specify an interval until
the equipment accesses the POP3 to check
presence of incoming messages.
TCP Port Number of POP3 Server
This code is used to enter a port number for
accessing the POP3 server.
Normally, "110" is set.
Number of Text Print Pages Control of Email Reception
This code is used to set the maximum number of pages of e-mail text to print.
MDN Reply at E-mail Reception
This code is used to select whether or not to
automatically return a message, when email is received.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

Maximum 128 letters

1: Auto, 2: POP, 3: APOP


* Default: 1
Maximum 96 letters

Maximum 96 letters

Acceptable values: 0 to 4096 (0 to 4096 minutes)


* Default: 5 (minutes)
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
* Default: 110
Acceptable values: 1 to 99 (1 to 99 pages)
* Default: 5 (pages)
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use these codes to receive a fax or an e-mail print job through the Internet, when POP3 is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 154

08-1055
FTP
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Description
When this code is used, a port number for accessing the FTP client is entered.
*
*

Default: 21
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535

Setting Timing
Use this code to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 155

08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099
SNMP
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility
is used.

Description
Code
08-1063

08-1065
08-1066

08-1069

08-1070
08-1099

Description
MIB Function
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable the MIB function.
"1" (available) is set to permit a user to use
the TopAccess, DocMon, TWAIN driver, File
Downloader and Address Book Viewer.
Setting of Read Community
This code is used to enter a trap community
name for the SNMP trap.
Setting of Read/Write Community
This code is used to enter a private community name, which permits reading and writing
through SNMP communication.
TRAP Destination IP address
This code is used to enter an IP address
where the SNMP trap is sent.
Community Setting of TRAP
This code is used to enter a trap community
name for the IP trap.
IPX TRAP Destination

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

Maximum 31 letters
* Default: public
Maximum 31 letters
* Default: private
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000
Enter an IP address in the following format:
"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"
e.g. 192.168.001.010
Maximum 31 letters
* Default: public
Maximum 24 letters
Letters from 0 to F are valid (0 to 9, A to F).
The address is expressed as "n.n.n.n:m-m-mm-m-m:oo" and each letter is 1 byte (2 letters).
It is not required to separate each letters by "."
(dot), ":" (colon), and "-" (hyphen).
Each "n" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates
the IPX Network Address.
Each "m" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates
the MacAddress.
"oo" is 2-byte data in binary, and indicates the
socket number.
e.g.
000000010040af7db4b80001
Enter 12 bytes (24 letters), from 0 to F as shown
above.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is
used.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 156

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 157

08-1073/1074
Raw TCP Print
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform Raw TCP printing.

Description
Code
08-1073
08-1074

Description
Availability of Raw TCP
This code is used to specify whether or not to
enable Raw TCP printing.
TCP Port Number of Raw
This code is used to enter a port number for Raw
TCP printing.
Normally, "9100" is set.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
* Default: 9100

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform Raw TCP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 158

08-1075 to 1077
LPD Print
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Description

3
Code
08-1075
08-1076

08-1077

Description
Availability of LPD Client
This code is used to specify whether or not to
enable LPD printing.
TCP Port Number of LPD
This code is used to enter a port number for LPD
printing.
Normally, "515" is set.
LPD Queue Name
This code is used to enter an LPD queue name.

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
Acceptable values: 1 to 65535
* Default: 515
Maximum 31 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 159

08-1078 to 1088
IPP Print
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Description
Code
08-1078
08-1079

08-1080

08-1081
08-1082

08-1083
08-1084

08-1085

08-1086
08-1087

Description
Availability of IPP
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable IPP printing.
Availability of IPP Port Number "80"
This code is used to specify whether or not
to enable port 80 in IPP printing.
Normally, port 631 is used for IPP access.
In this case, a user needs to specify the IPP
port number for an URL. Once "1" (available) is set, IPP access via port 80, which is
a standard port for HTTP access, is permitted. Therefore, an IPP port number does not
need to be specified for an URL any more.
TCP Port Number of IPP
This code is used to enter a port number for
IPP printing.
Normally, "631" is set.
IPP Printer Name
This code is used to enter a name of the IPP
printer.
IPP Printer Location
This code is used to enter a location to
install the equipment.
IPP Printer Information
This code is used to enter any information
regarding the equipment.
IPP Printer Information (More)
This code is used to enter the URL of the
website, where further information regarding
the equipment is introduced.
Installer of IPP Printer Driver
IPP is capable of automatically installing the
printer driver, when a URL of a location
where the printer driver installer is retrieved
is entered. But the equipment does not support this function.
IPP Printer "Make and Model"
This code is used to enter a manufacturer
name of the equipment.
IPP Printer Information (More) MFGR
This code is used to enter a URL of the website, where further information regarding a
manufacturer of the equipment is introduced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

Set value
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1
1: Available, 2: Not available
* Default: 1

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535


* Default: 631
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
e.g. If the equipment is installed Room 123
on the second floor in Building A, enter "A2F-Room No. 123."
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 127 letters
* Default:
http://www.e-studioseries.com/
Maximum 127 letters

Maximum 127 letters


* Default: TOSHIBA Corporation
Maximum 127 letters
* Default:
http://www.e-studioseries.com/

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 160

Code
08-1088

Description
IPP Message from Operator
This code is used to enter messages that an
operator or system administrator generates
in order to indicate the printer information or
status.

Set value
Maximum 127 letters

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 161

08-1093 to 1096
NetWare Print
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Description
Code
08-1093
08-1094
08-1095
08-1096

Description
Login Name to Novell Print Server
This code is used to enter a print server name created on the NetWare file server.
Login Password to Novell Print Server
This code is used to enter a login password specified on the print server, when necessary.
Name of Search Root Server
This code is used to enter a name of the NetWare
file server.
Scan Rate Setting of Print Queue

Set value
Maximum 47 letters
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
Acceptable values: 1 to 255 (1 to 255
seconds)
* Default: 5 (seconds)

Setting Timing
Use these codes to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 162

08-1114
Text Transmission of Internet FAX
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to permit the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet from the equipment.
There are two types of text transmitted, information, which equipment provides such as dates and page
numbers, and text, which a user enters on the control panel.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to permit the transmission of text is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.
0: Invalid (Does not transmit text)
1: Valid (Transmits text)
* 1: Valid (Transmits text)

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to disable the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted
through the Internet.

Caution

If Invalid is set, information such as dates and page numbers, which the equipment provides automatically, is not transmitted.
Even if "0" (Invalid) is set, a user can enter text on the control panel. However, this text is not transmitted.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 163

08-1123
NT Domain ON/OFF Setting
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
To participate in a Windows NT network domain or the Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory, the
NT domain needs to be enabled. However, only the workgroup is supported for the time being.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable the NT domain is reset.
Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to participate in the
workgroup.
3: NT domain ON (Domain selected)
* Workgroup enabled (The domain setting is disabled for the time being.)
4: NT domain OFF (Workgroup selected)
* Workgroup enabled
*

Default: 4

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to participate in a Windows NT network domain or Windows
Server 2000/2003 Active Directory.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 164

08-1124
Workgroup Name
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a
member of the group present on the Windows network.

Description
This code is used to enter a name of the workgroup.
Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to be a member of
the specified workgroup.
Set value = Name of workgroup
Up to 15 characters (ASCII)
* Default: workgroup

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment
belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 165

08-1141
Display of MAC Address
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the equipment.

Description
When this code is used, the MAC address is displayed.
e.g.
**:**:**:**:**:**
6-byte data is divided into colon-delimited 2-byte blocks.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the MAC address.

Caution
Make sure that the MAC address has been correctly registered, if the Network Printer Kit is replaced,
and then the serial number of the equipment is entered.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 166

08-1144
Processing in the event of Memory Full Error
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify the method of processing data (pages), which have been scanned, if the
amount of data exceeds the memory capacity during the scan operation.

Description
When this code is used, the method of processing pages, which have been scanned, is reset, in the
event of a memory full error.
0: Transfers scanned pages
1: Deletes scanned pages
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to reset the method in order to delete data, which have been
scanned, in the event of a memory full error.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 167

08-1149
Enhanced Bold for PCL6
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to make bold text much thicker, when PCL6 is used to print.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to make bold text much thicker is reset.
0: OFF
1: ON
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code, if bold text is not sufficiently printed in bold type.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 168

08-1372
Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment)
but not in sleep mode. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) is
shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
0 to 99999999 (hours)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

To display the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1378/1380/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 169

08-1378
Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state). If "0" is set,
the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state) is shown up to an
8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

To display the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1380/1382.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 170

08-1380
Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0
Cleaning
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time during printing). If "0" is set, the
counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time during printing) is shown up to an 8digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

To display the heater control time (accumulated time during printing).


To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1382.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 171

08-1382
Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter
Display / 0 Clearing
Purpose
This code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode). If "0" is
set, the counter is reset.

Description
When this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode) is shown up
to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

To display the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode).
To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
If 0 is set, 0 is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1380.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 172

08-1385/1386/1388
Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning
Purpose
These codes are used to count up the number of output pages by paper type at power-on of the registration sensor. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-1385
08-1386
08-1388

Applied to
Thick paper 1 mode, copy counts
Thick paper 2 mode, copy counts
Transparency film mode, copy counts

Description
When these codes are used, the number of output pages by paper type is shown up to an 8-digit
numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.
0 to 99999999 (pages)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing

To display the accumulated number of output pages by paper type.


To reset the counter to "0."

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 173

08-1410
Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter
Purpose
This code is used to display the toner cartridge driving time accumulated after a toner cartridge is supplied.

Description
When this code is used, the toner cartridge driving time is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.
The display is updated as follows:
* The counter value stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board is read and updated at power
ON or when the front cover is closed.
* The driving time is calculated and updated when a toner cartridge is driven through printing.
(Data is written into the IC chip when printing is completed.)
0 to 99999999 (1 count = 1 sec.)
* Default: 0

Setting Timing
Use this code to display the current toner cartridge driving time.

Caution
The counter value is stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board. The counter value g0h has been
written into the IC chip for a new toner cartridge; therefore, it is not necessary to use this code to reset
the counter value to g0,h after replacing a toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 174

08-1428
Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing
Purpose
This code is used to clear all remaining data on the SRAM.
This code is performed in order to prevent data leak when the MAIN board is disposed of.

Description
When this code is used, all remaining data on the SRAM is cleared.

Setting Timing
Use this code to dispose of the MAIN board (to replace the broken MAIN board, or to dispose of the
equipment).

Caution

When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up unless the MAIN board is
replaced. Therefore, never perform this code other than when disposing of the MAIN board.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 175

08-1440
IP Conflict Detect
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to initialize and take over network-related settings during the
update.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to enable initialization and takeover of network-related settings
is reset.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to forcibly operate the network printer controller, even if an IP collision occurs when ARP
is used.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 176

08-1447
IPP admin Name
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the name of the user who has the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 177

08-1448
IPP admin Password
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password for the authority to control all IPP jobs.

Description
When this code is used, the user password for the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password for the authority to control IPP.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 178

08-1449
IPP authentication method
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to perform authentication, and also the method to perform
authentication, when the IPP port is created.

Description
When this code is used, the method to perform authentication is reset when the IPP port is created.
1: Disabled
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
Use this code to create the IPP port on the PC.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 179

08-1450
User name for IPP authentication
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on
the client.

Description
When this code is used, the user name to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is created on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 180

08-1451
Password for IPP authentication
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to display the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created
on the client.

Description
When this code is used, the user password to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is
created on the client.

Setting Timing
Use this code to check the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on
the client.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 181

08-1628
Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum Reverse/Forward Rotation
Amount
Purpose
This code is used to additionally correct the amount of reverse and forward rotation of the drum during
cleaning, when a certain amount or more of paper is fed, to thoroughly clean the drum, even if poor
quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used.
If the drum is rotated too much in reverse when the drum or recovery blade is in the initial state (standby
position), the recovery blade is more likely to curl up. Therefore, apply an additional correction, only if a
certain amount or more of paper is fed. As the amount of reverse rotation is larger, toner is more likely
to spill from the drum cleaner. The drum is rotated in reverse and forward with the same amount of rotation, and then stops.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-1628

Sub code
0
1

Applied to
Drum life correction of the reverse rotation amount
Drum life correction of the forward rotation amount

Description
When this code is used, the amount of additional correction for the amount of rotation of the drum during cleaning is adjusted.
Set value x 10m sec. = Drum rotation time
0: Not corrected
1 to 15: Corrected (10 to 150m sec.: approx. 0.9 to 13.5 mm)
* Default: 08-1628-0: 4, 08-1628-1: 9
*

The correction distance is not constant due to the driving rattle or error when the motor starts up, to
switch the rotation direction of the main motor.

Setting Timing

If toner spills from the drum cleaner. (Set a smaller value.)


If the main motor is replaced with a different type of main motor.

Caution

Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.


Change the amount of both reverse and forward rotation, to change this set value. If the amount of
forward rotation is larger than that of reverse rotation, an unusual noise may occur. Therefore, never
make the amount of forward rotation larger than that of reverse rotation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 182

08-1882
Initialization of the Scan Memory Area
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard
are installed.

Purpose
This code is used to initialize the memory area storing scanned-in data.

Description
When this code is used, the area storing scanned-in data is initialized.

Setting Timing
Use this code to initialize the area storing scanned-in data for some reason.

Caution
If this code is used to initialize the memory area, all scanned-in data is cleared.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 183

08-1913
Function Clear LED Flashing
Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to flash the reset light, if the copy function setting is different
from the default after the copy operation ends. The reset light flashes until the specified function is
cleared (the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up).

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to flash the reset light is reset after the copy operation ends.
0: Invalid (Always OFF)
1: Valid
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
At the request of a user, use this code to stop the reset light flashing.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 184

08-1952 to 1955
Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version Display
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
The FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains the controller ROM, which is used for controlling the Network Printer Controller. The CF (Compact Flash) for
the Scanner Upgrade Kit contains the scan ROM for controlling the Scanner Upgrade Kit. These codes
are used to display and check the versions of these data.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-1952
08-1953
08-1954
08-1955

Applied to
Controller ROM program version display
Scanner ROM program version display
Controller ROM internal program version display
Scanner ROM internal program version display

Description
When these codes are used, the versions of the data stored in each memory are shown as follows:
08-1952:
Program version: T282CN0XXXX
* X: Version
08-1953:
Program version: T282SC0XXXX
* X: Version
08-1954/1955:
Internal program version: VTCXX.YYYZ.
* X: Major version, Y: Minor version
Z: Language code (EUR: E, JPN: J, UC: U)
*

Descriptions for codes 08-1954 and 08-1955 are the same.

Setting Timing
Use these codes to check the version of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the controller ROM or scan ROM.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 185

08-1960 to 1979
IP Address Range for IP Filter
*
*

These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
These codes are used to accept only the print jobs within the IP address range specified for printing.
The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:
Code
08-1960
08-1961
08-1962
08-1963
08-1964
08-1965
08-1966
08-1967
08-1968
08-1969
08-1970
08-1971
08-1972
08-1973
08-1974
08-1975
08-1976
08-1977
08-1978
08-1979

Applied to
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 2)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 5)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 7)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9)
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 10)
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)

Description
When these codes are used, each minimum IP address and each maximum IP address of ten areas
are entered.
000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
* Default: 000.000.000.000

Setting Timing
Use these codes to limit the users who can use the print function according to the IP address.

Caution

If 0.0.0.0 is entered in both ranges of the paired minimum area and maximum area, this function is
disabled.
This function does not affect Samba printing and Point & Print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 186

08-1989
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Domain Name Server Option (6)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name
server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server
is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
The condition where the domain name server option (6) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address
from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 187

08-1990
Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP
The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and
Secondary WINS Name
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS (Windows
Internet name service) under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 1

Setting Timing
he condition where the WINS server option (44) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 188

08-1991
Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment
under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment from
the DHCP server is reset.
1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)
2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to manage the Host Name of the equipment in the DHCP server.

Caution
Currently, no unique Host Name can be set in Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003. Therefore, it
is recommended to ignore this code.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 189

08-1993
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server
under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server from
the DHCP server is reset.
1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)
2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
Use this code to acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 190

08-1994
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 under the
environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the POP3 server option (70) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 191

08-1996
Enable Servers IP Address acquired by DHCP
The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address
*
*

This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.


This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

Purpose
This code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP under the
environment where the DHCP server is used.

Description
When this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP is reset under
the environment where the DHCP server is used.
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
* Default: 2

Setting Timing
The condition where the SNTP server option (42) is set for the DHCP server under the environment
where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set Enabled to acquire the address from
the DHCP server.

Caution
No particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 192

KIMIA TEJARAT SHAKIBA

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen